'■4~W  ' 


t 


BV  2570  ^8^cameron,  A 80 
tov^ri  e » 

1900.  f fissions 

^ rnanua'  ° ,a5^ 


% 


■ 


<r 


, 


I 


MA  P OF  THE 


EXPLANATION. 

PROTESTANT 

HO  MAX  CATHOLIC 
HEATHEN 


EXPLANATION. 


FROTHS TAN  T 

HOMAN  CATHOLIC 

CREEK  CII UltCH 

JIOHA.METAN 

DECAYED  CHRISTIAN  CHI 'ft  CUES 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2017  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/manualofmissions00lowr_0 


A MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS; 


litttjjos  »f  % Jfireijn  |pssi<ms  of  t|t  Jjrtskjfmiitt  (flmrdi : 

WITH 

MAPS,  SHOWING  THE  STATIONS, 


STATISTICS  OF  PROTESTANT  MISSIONS  AMONG  UNEVANGELIZED  NATIONS. 


BY  JOHN  C. 


ONE  OF  THE  SECRETARIES  OF  THE  BOARD  OF  FOREIGN  MISSIONS  OF  THE  PRESBYTERIAN  CHURCH. 


NEW  YORK: 

ANSON  D . F.  RANDOLPH,  683  BROADWAY. 

1 8 5 4. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1854,  in  the  Clerk’s  Office  of  the  District  Court 
of  the  United  States,  for  the  Southern  District  of  New  York. 


E.  0.  JENKINS,  PRINTER  & STEREOTTPER, 

111  Nassau  Stmt,  Nrhj  gork. 


CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTION. 

Pi 

The  Missionary  "Work  widely  extended  — Some  ask,  “To  what  purpose  is 
this  waste?”  — In  reply,  consider  — i.  The  Origin  of  the  Missionary  Cause — ii. 
The  Commandment  of  our  Lord — iii,  The  Example  of  the  Primitive  Church  — 
iv.  The  Benevolent  Nature  of  the  Christian  Religion — v.  The  Spiritual  Condition 
of  Men  without  the  Gospel  — vi.  The  Events  of  Providence  in  our  Day  — vii. 
The  Seal  of  the  Holy  Spirit — viii.  The  Certainty  of  final  Success,  - 

THE  BOARD  OF  FOREIGN  MISSIONS. 

Example  of  the  early  Christians — The  best  "kind  of  Missionary  Organization  — 
The  Board,  a Standing  Committee  of  the  General  Assembly  — Executive  Duties 
and  Arrangements — Financial  Matters  — Mission  House,  Library,  and  Museum. 

MISSIONS  AMONG  THE  INDIAN  TRIBES. 

The  Indians  of  our  day,  two  classes  — Weas  — Iowas  and  Sacs  — Chippewas 
and  Ottawas  — Creeks  — Choctaws  — Otoes  and  Omahaws  — Seminoles  — Chicka- 
sawa  — Boarding-school  system  — Example  of  the  good  Influence  of  these  Mis- 
sions,   


15 


MISSIONS  IN  WESTERN  AFRICA. 

Brief  Survey  of  Africa  — Western  Africa— Population  — Condition  of  the  Na- 
tives— Causes  changing  this  condition:  the  armed  Squadrons;  Sierra  Leone; 
Liberia;  Commerce;  above  all,  the  Gospel  — Climate  — Missions  in  Liberia — 
Mission  on  Corisco,  - --  -.----.-.-26 


MISSIONS  IN  NORTH  INDIA. 

PAGE 

General  Account  of  India  and  the  Hindus  — Religion;  Transmigration;  Caste; 
Character  of  Hinduism  — Political  Relations  — Causes  overturning  Idolatry  — 
Sketch  of  the  Missions  — Preaching,  statedly,  on  Journeys,  and  at  Melas— 

The  Press — Schools  — Happy  Deaths  of  Converts,  ------  34 

MISSION  IN  SIAM. 

Brief  Description  of  the  Country  and  People  — Government— Budhist  Reli- 
gion— Account  of  the  Mission;  Singular  Exigency  in  its  Affairs ; Happy  Change; 
Work  in  progress  — The  King  of  Siam,  ........46 

MISSIONS  IN  CHINA. 

The  largest  Field  of  modern  Missions  — The  Country,  Population,  and  Civiliza- 
tion of  China — Three  Religious  Systems,  Confucianism,  Taouism,  and  Budhism 
— The  door  long  closed  now  open;  wonderful  Events  in  progress  — Sketch  of 
the  Missions;  Printing  on  metallic  Types;  Conversion  of  an  aged  Idolater — Mis- 
sion to  the  Chinese  in  California — Large  Emigration  of  Chinese  may  be  expected,  50 

MISSIONS  TO  ROMAN  CATHOLICS. 

The  Province  of  the  Board  includes  all  the  Work  of  Foreign  Missions  — Rea- 
sons for  Evangelical  Missions  among  Romanists — Method  of  Proceeding — What 
has  been  done  — Greater  Efforts  should  he  made,  - --  --  --57 

MISSION  TO  THE  JEWS. 

The  Jews,  foreigners  everywhere  — Peculiar  Qualifications  required  by  mission- 

3 


CONTENTS, 


aries Sketch  of  the  Mission — The  Jews,  when  converted,  Missionaries  in  every 

Land,  ~ - 

UNEVANGELIZED  COUNTEIES. 


59 


L II.  The  World, 
III.  Indian  Tribes, 


Countries  and  Tribes  yet  unenlightened  by  the  Gospel — Indian  Tribes — Span- 
ish American  States — West  Indies — Africa — Asia — Islands  of  the  Sea — Ro- 
manists and  Greeks-— Summary  View  of  the  Religions  of  Mankind,  - - 61 


IV.  Africa, 

V.  India  and  Siam, 
VI.  China, 


MAPS. 


STATISTICS  OF  PROTESTANT  MISSIONS. 

Light  dawning — Object  of  this  Paper;  difficulty  in  obtaining  uniform  and 
exact  Returns ; Authorities  cited — Statistics  of  Indian  Missions — Missions  in  the 
West  Indies — Spanish  America — Africa,  North  and  East — Africa,  South  — 
Africa,  Western — Asia,  Western — Asia,  India  and  Ceylon — Asia,  Burmah  and 

gjam Asia,  China — Islands  in  the  China  Seas  and  the  Pacific — Tabular  State- 

ment List  of  Missionaries,  classified  according  to  leading  Denominations,  - - 65 


View  of  the  Mission  House, 


APPENDIX. 
List  of  Missionaries  among  the  Indian  Tribes,  - 

General  Statement  of  Receipts,  - 


***  The  peculiar  form  of  this  book  has  been  chosen,  in  order  to  admit  the  Maps  unfolded. 


FAGB 

Feontispieoe. 

- 15 

- 26 

- - - 84 

- - - 50 

■ - - 18 

- - - 72 

- - - 78 


INTRODUCTION. 


“ ®f)j)  SUntfUonr  tome ! ” 


The  work  of  Christian  Missions  has  become  one  of  the  marked  fea- 
tures of  this  age.  The  larger  bodies  of  Christians,  and  many  of  the 
smaller,  have  then.'  missionary  stations  in  various  parts  of  the  world. 
Large  sums  of  money  are  expended  for  the  support  of  missionaries,  the 
establishment  of  schools,  and  the  printing  of  the  Holy  Scriptures.  Hun- 
dreds of  men  of  superior  education,  and  their  wives,  women  of  refined 
manners  and  cultivated  minds,  have  gone  to  live  among  the  Indians 
of  our  western  forests,  the  Negroes  and  the  Hottentots  of  Africa,  the 
Hindus  and  the  Chinese,  the  Feejeeans  and  others  in  the  islands  of  the 
sea ; — they  and  their  families  are  found  living  far  from  them  early 
homes,  in  unfriendly  climes,  amongst  rude  and  debased  tribes,  and  pa- 
tiently laboring  year  after  year  to  instruct  the  ignorant,  and  convert 
the  depraved  and  degraded  people  around  them.  This  stands  out  to 
public  view. 

Some  observers  see  all  this  without  sympathy,  and  some  venture  even 
to  condemn  the  conduct  of  these  missionaries  and  their  supporters  at 
home.  “ To  what  purpose  is  this  waste  ? Why  should  the  labors  of  so 
many  superior  men  and  women  be  lost  to  their  friends  and  their  own 
people?” 

In  reply,  some  of  the  grounds  on  which  the  Church  is  led  to  sup- 
port the  cause  of  missions  may  be  very  briefly  stated.  These  will 
appear  if  we  consider, — 

I.  The  Origin  of  the  Missionary  Cause. — This  we  ascribe  to  no- 
thing lower  nor  later  than  the  eternal  love  and  purpose  of  God.  The 
world  perishing  in  its  sin  against  himself  was  before  the  mind  of  God  from 
eternity.  Every  human  being,  sinful,  lost,  and  hopeless,  liite  the  apos- 


tate angels,  was  known  unto  God  from  the  beginning.  All  the  dreadful 
darkness,  wickedness,  and  wretchedness  that  should  abound  amongst 
fallen  men,  which  if  unrestrained  would  make  the  earth  to  be  but  the 
vestibule  of  hell  itself, — all  these  God  foresaw  before  the  world  was 
made.  The  wickedness  of  men  makes  it  necessary  that  judgments 
should  fall  upon  the  earth,  yet  still  the  purpose  of  God  towards  our 
fallen  world  was  from  eternity  full  of  grace.  And  from  the  divine  coun- 
sels proceeds  the  only  salvation  of  lost  sinners.  To  accomplish  this,  God 
“ spared  not  his  own  Son,  but  freely  gave  him  up.”  “ For  God  so  loved 
the  world  that  he  gave  his  only-begotten  Son  to  die,  that  whosoever 
believeth  in  him  should  not  perish,  but  have  everlasting  life.”  In  this 
we  “ know  the  grace  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  that  though  he  was  rich, 
for  our  sakes  he  became  poor,  that  we  through  his  poverty  might  be  rich.” 
The  invitation  is  now  sent  forth,  among  the  Heathen,  Mohammedans, 
Jews,  and  all  others,  “ Look  unto  me  and  be  ye  saved,  all  the  ends  of 
the  earth.”  He  that  believeth  shall  be  saved  ; he  that  believeth  not  is 
condemned  already.  The  Church  has  been  established  among  men,  and 
her  ministers  and  members  have  received  the  means  of  grace  for  their 
own  salvation,  and  as  trustees  for  those  who  are  destitute.  Freely  they 
have  received  ; freely  they  must  give.  Their  agency  in  this  work  is 
contemplated  in  the  divine  purpose.  Angels  might  have  been  em- 
ployed as  missionaries,  but  this  was  not  the  will  of  God.  His  purpose 
to  save  his  people  was  to  be  fulfilled  by  the  agency  of  redeemed  sin- 
ners. 

This  was  the  origin  of  the  missionary  work.  It  is  not  of  human  de- 
vising. It  is  not  of  this  world.  It  is  not  of  time.  It  is  of  God,  from 


INTRODUCTION. 


everlasting.  Its  progress  among  men  is  by  the  grace  and  power  of 
God.  And  hence  its  final  issue  is  a matter  of  certainty,  and  its  triumph 
shall  be  to  the  glory  of  God,  in  this  world  and  in  everlasting  ages. 

II.  The  Commandment  of  oue  Loed. — “Jesus  came  and  spake  unto 
them,  saying,  All  power  is  given  unto  me  in  heaven  and  in  earth. 
Go  ye,  therefore,  and  teach  all  nations,  baptizing  them  in  the  name  of 
the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  and  of  the  Holy  Ghost : teaching  them 
to  observe  all  things  whatsoever  I have  commanded  you.  And  lo,  I 
am  with  you  alway,  even  unto  the  end  of  the  world.”  Matt,  xxviii. 
18-20  ; Mark  xvi.  15  ; Luke  xxiv.  47. 

The  permanent  obligation  of  this  commandment  is  clearly  shown  by 
its  own  nature.  While  any  nation  or  even  any  human  being  is  unac- 
quainted with  the  gospel,  this  law  remains  in  full  force.  The  promise 
accompanying  it  also  shows  its  permanent  authority.  The  promise  of 
the  Saviour’s  presence  is  inseparable  from  the  commandment.  How 
then  can  the  Church,  or  the  ministers  of  the  gospel,  expect  the  ful- 
filment of  this  most  precious  promise  of  our  Lord,  while  neglecting 
the  duty  with  which  it  is  connected  ? 

To  show  how  lamentably  this  commandment  has  been  hitherto  neg- 
lected by  the  Church — “ Let  ns  imagine  that  instead  of  the  world,  a single 
country  had  been  pointed  out  by  our  Lord  as  the  field  of  action.  And 
since  we  are  most  familiar  with  our  own  land,  let  us  just  suppose  that 
the  particular  country  specified  was  the  United  States  :*  and  that  in- 
stead of  the  command  to  go  forth  and  preach  the  gospel  to  every  crea- 
ture, the  order  had  been  tn  go  through  all  the  parts  of  this  country 
and  preach  the  gospel  to  every  inhabitant.  I find  that  on  a scale 
which  would  make  the  population  of  the  United  States  represent  that 
of  the  world,  the  population  of  the  city  of  New  York  might  be  taken 
as  a sufficiently  accurate  representation  of  our  own  country. 

“ In  order  then  to  have  a just  picture  of  the  present  state  of  the 
world,  only  conceive  that  all  who  had  received  the  above  commission, 
somehow  or  other,  had  contrived  to  gather  themselves  together  within 
the  limits  of  this  single  city.  Imagine  to  yourselves  all  the  other  parts 

* This  striking  quotation  is  taken  from  the  lamented  Urquhart’s  Memoirs,  with 
American  names  substituted  for  English. 


of  the  State  of  New  York,  and  all  the  other  portions  of  this  widely 
extended  confederacy,  immersed  in  heathen  darkness ; and  that  by  these 
Christians,  who  had  so  unaccountably  happened  to  settle  down  together 
in  one  little  spot,  no  effort  was  made  to  evangelize  the  rest  of  the  land 
except  by  collecting  a little  money,  and  sending  forth  a few  men,” — and 
you  have  a true  but  sad  picture  of  what  Christians  are  now  doing  for 
the  spread  of  the  gospel  in  the  world  at  large. 

HI.  The  Example  of  the  Primitive  Church. — Hardly  any  thing 
was  more  characteristic  of  the  early  Christians  than  the  missionary 
spirit.  They  evidently  understood  our  Lord’s  commandment  as  requir- 
ing them  to  spread  the  gospel  everywhere  in  the  world,  and  to  do  this 
in  foreign  countries  without  waiting  until  the  work  of  evangelization 
was  completed  in  their  owm.  They  were  to  begin  at  Jerusalem,  and 
thence  to  go  forth  amongst  all  nations,  preaching  repentance  and  for- 
giveness of  sin  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ.  See  the  example,  particu- 
larly, of  one  of  the  earliest  churches,  if  not  the  first,  organized  among 
the  gentiles.  The  disciples  were  first  called  Christians  in  Antioch,  and 
the  church  in  that  city  sent  forth  two  of  the  most  eminent  ministers, 
Paul  and  Barnabas,  on  an  extended  foreign  missionary  expedition. 
This  was  done  while  the  church  itself  was  few  in  numbers,  feeble  in 
resources,  in  the  midst  of  a heathen  city,  no  doubt  actively  engaged  in 
home  missionary  labors,  but  yet  willing  to  make  sacrifices  for  those 
perishing  in  the  regions  beyond  the  limits  of  Antioch  or  of  Syria.  This 
was  the  spirit  which  animated  the  Church  in  the  purest  age  of  her  history, 
and  this  was  the  secret  of  her  power  at  home  and  abroad.  She  watered 
the  fields  of  others,  and  God  watered  her  own  gardens.  She  scattered, 
and  yet  increased.  The  faith,  and  love,  and  devotedness  of  her  own 
members  were  strengthened  by  their  missionary  labors.  The  examples 
of  apostolic  missionaries  reacted  upon  the  churches,  making  her  mem- 
bers apostolic.  The  death  of  devoted  laborers  in  the  spread  of  the 
gospel,  called  other  laborers  into  the  harvest.  And  the  work  advanced 
with  power. 

rV.  The  Benevolent  Nature  of  the  Christian  Religion. — It 
prompts  us  to  love  our  neighbor  as  ourselves ; to  do  to  others  as  we 
would  have  others  to  do  unto  us ; to  do  good  unto  all  men  as  we  have 
opportunity.  The  influence  of  divine  grace  on  the  heart  is  the  very 


! 


I 

1 


| 


I 


INTRODUCTION.  7 


opposite  of  every  thing  selfish ; it  is  diffusive  and  evangelistic.  It 
leads  us  to  pity  them  that  sit  in  darkness  and  the  shadow  of  death. 
It  constrains  us  to  carry  or  send  the  gospel  with  all  its  blessings  to 
every  creature. 

V.  The  Spiritual  Condition  of  Men  without  the  Gospel. — This 
is  truly  deplorable.  Ignorance,  superstition,  and  depravity, — almost 
all  kinds  of  evil, — abound  in  countries  where  the  light  of  the  Sun  of 
righteousness  does  not  shine.  Under  afflictions  their  inhabitants  are 
destitute  of  support,  and  in  death  they  are  without  hope.  This  is  stated 
with  solemnity.  Some  think  the  heathen  will  be  saved  without  the  gos- 
pel. They  certainly  will  not  be  condemned  for  rejecting  a Saviour  of 
whom  they  have  never  heard ; they  will  be  judged  according  to  the  light 
which  they  enjoyed.  Rom.  i.  20 ; ii.  12-15.  But  “ without  holiness  no 
man  shall  see  the  Lord.”  With  hearts  depraved,  and  living  in  sin  to  the 
very  end  of  life,  on  what  ground  can  we  expect  their  salvation  ? God 
may,  indeed,  extend  salvation  to  sinners  without  the  means  of  grace  ; 
he  does  this,  in  the  case  of  those  who  are  saved  in  infancy,  and  of 
such  as  received  immediate  revelations  from  heaven  before  the  writ- 
ten word  was  given.  But  the  sacred  Scripture  shows  that  salvation 
is  now  extended  to  adult  men  only  through  Jesus  Christ,  and  through 
the  means  of  grace.  Thus  it  is  written,  “ Whosoever  shall  call  on 
the  name  of  the  Lord  shall  be  saved.  How  then  shall  they  call  on 
him  in  whom  they  have  not  believed  ? And  how  shall  they  believe  in 
him  of  whom  they  have  not  heard  ? And  how  shall  they  hear  with- 
out a preacher  ? ...  So  then  faith  cometh  by  hearing,  and  hearing 
by  the  word  of  God.”  Rom.  x.  13, 14, 17. 

YI.  The  Events  of  Providence  in  our  Day. — These  point  in  the 
line  of  Christian  Missions.  The  changes  among  the  nations  of  the  earth 
within  the  last  twenty  years  have  removed  many  barriers  to  the  spread 
of  the  gospel,  and  opened  doors  which  had  been  closed  for  centuries. 

' The  wonderful  progress  of  commerce  is  tributary  to  the  progress  of 
missions.  The  steam  printing-press,  the  steam  railway-coach,  the  ocean 
steam-ship,  and  the  electric  telegraph,  are  all  servants  of  the  God  of 
missions,  and  tend  greatly  to  promote  the  interests  of  the  missionary 
work.  Christian  and  pagan  nations  are  now  brought  into  close  rela- 
tionship. The  British  and  the  Hindus  live  under  the  same  laws.  Our 


countrymen  and  the  Chinese  are  meeting  on  the  shores  of  the  Pacific ; 
the  Chinese  themselves  are  moved  by  a strange  revolution,  looking 
towards  Christianity.  Africa  can  be  reached  with  ease  from  Liver- 
pool or  New  York.  Multitudes  of  Roman  Catholics  are  seeking  their 
homes  in  countries  where  the  Bible  is  an  open  book. 

YH.  The  Seal  of  the  Holy  Spirit. — “ If  this  work  be  of  men,  it 
will  come  to  naught ; but  if  it  be  of  God,”  it  cannot  be  overthrown.  No 
more  decisive  proofs  of  the  favor  of  Heaven  have  been  given  to  any  cause 
than  to  that  of  foreign  missions,  by  the  gracious  work  of  the  Holy  Spirit. 
Souls  have  been  converted  in  every  mission.  The  power  of  Budhism, 
Brahmanism,  and  Fetichism,  has  been  broken  in  many  instances.  The 
False  Prophet  and  the  Papal  Anti-Christ  have  both  been  compelled  to 
yield  their  subjects  to  the  missionary,  to  be  led  to  Jesus  Christ  for  sal- 
vation. Converts  in  large  numbers  among  the  Indian  tribes,  in  Africa, 
Asia,  and  the  islands  of  the  sea,  have  adorned  their  Christian  profession 
by  an  exemplary  life,  and  many  have  died  in  the  faith  and  hope  of  the 
gospel.  The  concluding  chapter  of  this  volume  gives  encouraging 
returns  of  church-members  in  different  missionary  lands. 

YHI.  The  Certainty  of  final  Success. — For  this,  the  Church  relies 
on  the  word  of  God.  “ The  earth  shall  be  full  of  the  knowledge  of  the 
Lord,  as  the  waters  cover  the  sea.”  “All  nations  whom  thou  hast 
made  shall  come  and  worship  before  thee,  0 Lord ; and  shall  glorify 
thy  name.”  “ Until  the  fulness  of  the  Gentiles  be  brought  in  ; and  so 
all  Israel  shall  be  saved.”  These  are  examples  of  prophetic  language 
concerning  the  prevalence  of  the  kingdom  of  our  Lord  and  Saviour, 
Jesus  Christ.  With  these  predictions  in  view,  no  Christian  can  doubt 
the  final  issue  of  the  contest  now  waging  in  the  world  between  the 
powers  of  darkness  and  of  light.  Nor  can  any  reasonable  doubt  be 
entertained  concerning  the  success  of  the  measures  now  commonly  em- 
ployed by  the  Church  in  the  missionary  work,  as  tending  to  the  general 
diffusion  of  Christianity.  These  measures  are  the  same,  substantially, 
in  unenlightened  as  in  Christian  lands.  The  simple  story  of  the  cross, 
the  preaching  of  Christ  and  him  crucified,  is  the  main  characteristic 
of  the  work  of  missions  in  modern  as  in  ancient  times.  All  Protestant 
missionaries  “preach  Christ  crucified,  unto  the  Jews  a stumbling- 
block,  and  unto  the  Greeks  foolishness ; but  unto  them  which  are  called, 


INTRODUCTION. 


8 


both  Jews  and  Greeks,  Christ  the  power  of  God  and  the  wisdom  of 
God.”  The  success  of  this  apostolic  preaching  will  become  more 
marked  in  coming  ages,  until  all  nations  are  converted  unto  God.  We 
know  no  other  means  of  success ; we  look  for  no  other  dispensation  of 
grace ; the  outpouring  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  as  on  the  day  of  Pentecost, 
shall  be  witnessed  in  every  place  where  the  gospel  is  preached  ; and 
the  long  ages  of  the  one  thousand  years,  each  measured  in  prophetic 
time,  shall  bring  forth  their  myriads  of  truly  Christian  people.  Then 
shall  our  Redeemer  “ see  of  the  travail  of  his  soul,  and  be  satisfied.” 

On  grounds  like  these  does  the  Church  of  Christ  proceed  in  her  mis- 
sionary work.  Her  faith  is  in  God,  and  in  the  power  of  his  grace. 
Inspired  by  this  view,  and  sustained  by  the  presence  of  the  Saviour, 
her  sons  and  daughters  go  forth  as  missionaries.  They  labor  in  various 
fields,  with  various  success,  enduring  manifold  privations,  for  longer  or 
shorter  days ; and  then  they  go  to  their  rest.  But  their  works  do  fol- 
low them.  Their  memory  is  dear  to  the  Church.  Nations  now  hear 
then  shall  in  future  ages  bless  their  names.  The  Saviour  will  give  to 


them  a crown  of  life.  And  in  the  heavenly  glory,  they  will  evermore 
rejoice  that  they  were  counted  worthy  to  be  missionaries  of  the  cross. 


This  Manual,  it  is  hoped,  will  be  acceptable  to  many  of  the  friends 
of  missions.  It  has  been  prepared  chiefly  for  the  use  of  those  who 
have  not  had  an  opportunity  of  becoming  acquainted  with  the  fields 
of  labor  occupied  by  the  Presbyterian  Church.  It  is  not  a history  of 
these  missions  ; the  time  for  wilting  this  has  not  yet  come.  Most  of 
the  missionaries  are  yet  among  the  living,  and  long  may  their  lives  be 
spared  i Their  labors,  moreover,  have  been  but  laiely  commenced. 
The  aim  of  the  author  has  been  simply  to  embody  such  information 
in  this  little  work  as  would  be  likely  to  prove  useful  and  convenient 
for  reference.  The  pecuniary  avails  of  his  labor  are  devoted  to  the 
missionary  cause. 

The  last  two  chapters  have  been  added  at  the  suggestion  of  a valued 
friend,  to  whom  this  book  is  otherwise  much  indebted. 

New  York,  April,  1854. 


I. 

TEE  BOA  EE  OF  FOREIGN  MISSIONS. 

“ILet  all  tfrfnas  fie  bone  fiecentlj;  anti  fn  other.” 


The  New  Testament  contains  frequent  accounts  of  the  missionary 
labors  of  the  early  Christians,  which  go  to  show  that  they  acted 
together  in  this  work.  They  considered  it  the  common  and  great  work 
of  the  Church,  in  which  all  its  members,  clerical  and  lay,  male  and 
female,  were  called  to  take  a part.  Pecuniary  gifts  were  made  and 
missionaries  sent  forth  in  aid  of  this  cause.  Whatever  part  individuals 
might  perform,  each  in  his  own  sphere,  it  seems  to  be  evident  that, 
under  some  simple  method  of  organization,  the  early  Christians  were 
united  in  their  efforts  to  preach  the  gospel  to  every  creature.  And 
from  some  things  in  the  sacred  narrative,  we  infer  that  their  proceedings 
were  either  directly  or  indirectly  under  the  supervision  of  their  church 
courts.  In  the  first  age  of  Christianity,  we  may  believe,  the  work  of 
missions  was  the  work  of  the  Church.  Acts  xiii.  1-4,  and  xiv.  27. 

Whatever  may  have  been  the  practice  of  the  first  Christians  in  this 
matter,  it  appears  to  be  manifestly  expedient  that  Christians  of  the 
present  age  should  carry  forward  the  missionary  work  under  some  kind 
of  organization.  In  union  there  is  strength  ; isolated  and  individual 
efforts  are  commonly  feeble,  and  liable  to  interruption.  Without  some 
common  channel  for  the  waters,  many  a pure  stream  could  never  reach 
the  sea  ; many  sincere  disciples  could  do  little  but  pray  for  the  spread 
of  the  gospel,  if  there  were  no  common  method  of  receiving  and  ex- 
pending their  offerings. 

The  missionary  work,  however,  is  great.  It  embraces  the  unevan- 


gelized nations,  of  whatever  country.  It  includes  every  good  method 
of  planting  and  building  up  the  Church.  Its  object  is  simple  and  grand, 
but  the  means  it  employs  to  achieve  this  object  are  varied,  according 
to  the  various  gifts  of  the  laborers,  and  the  differing  circumstances  of 
unevangelized  people.  The  followers  of  Christ,  moreover,  are  living 
in  different  countries.  A universal  missionary  institution  could  be 
conducted  only  on  the  plan  of  concentrating  the  whole  power  in  the 
hands  of  a few  men,  who  would  be  virtually  irresponsible  to  their 
brethren.  The  fallen  Church  of  Eome  is  the  only  body  that  attempts 
to  carry  forward  missions  by  such  an  organization,  and  her  success  does 
not  invite  imitation.  Even  when  Christians  live  in  the  same  country, 
though  delightfully  one  in  spirit  and  in  purpose,  they  embrace  different 
views  of  doctrinal  and  ecclesiastical  questions.  Their  harmony  and 
efficiency  at  home  would  not  be  promoted  by  their  fusion  into  one 
denomination,  neither  would  their  missionary  labors  abroad  be  more 
effective  by  being  placed  under  the  charge  of  a common  Society. 
Questions  about  the  mode  and  subjects  of  baptism,  the  use  of  ruling 
elders  in  the  Church,  not  to  instance  purely  doctrinal  points,  present 
themselves  as  readily  at  a missionary  station,  when  the  gospel  begins 
to  bring  forth  fruit  in  the  conversion  of  souls,  as  they  do  in  a Christian 
land  ; and  if  the  missionaries  hold  conflicting  opinions  on  these  questions, 
the  peace  and  prosperity  of  their  infant  churches  are  likely  to  be 
seriously  injured. 


lO  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 

It  is  best  for  each  large  body  of  Christians  to  have  their  own  mis- 
sionary organization ; and  the  simpler  this  can  be  made,  the  better. 
Its  form  must  depend  in  some  degree  on  the  distinctive  institutions  and 
customs  of  the  denomination  : the  prevailing  views  of  Church  govern- 
ment in  each  body  will  materially  influence  the  form  of  missionary  move- 
ment. On  the  Independent  theory,  which  considers  every  particular 
church  as  sustaining  no  relations  to  other  churches,  excepting  those  of 
Christian  fellowship,  it  would  be  difficult  to  frame  a Missionary  Society 
on  a plan  that  would  secure  direct  responsibility  to  the  churches  as 
churches.  This  form  of  church  government  provides  no  common  court 
of  appeal,  no  general  superintending  body.  Recourse  must  be  had  to 
some  kind  of  associated  action  separate  from  the  churches,  or  not  eccle- 
siastical ; and  reliance  must  be  placed  mainly  on  the  public  opinion 
of  the  denomination  for  a satisfactory  administration  of  its  affairs. 
The  Methodist,  Episcopal,  and  Presbyterian  denominations  have  their 
respective  peculiarities,  also,  and  it  would  be  easy  to  show  how  these 
have  affected  the  question  of  missionary  polity. 

A Society  may  be  denominational,  and  yet  not  ecclesiastical, — sup- 
ported exclusively  by  the  members  of  some  one  denomination,  sending 
forth  only  missionaries  of  its  order,  and  yet  not  amenable  to  its  eccle- 
siastical authorities,  but  to  those  persons  only  who  contribute  to  its 
funds.  In  some  conditions  of  the  Church,  this  form  may  be  expedient, 
and,  indeed,  the  only  one  practicable ; as  where  the  prevailing  state  of 
feeling  is  hostile  to  missions.  In  the  Presbyterian  Church,  it  should 
be  acknowledged  with  gratitude,  no  expedient  of  this  kind  is  needful. 
The  duty  of  Christian  missions  is  commonly  recognized,  and  it  is  found 
quite  practicable  to  frame  a missionary  organization  agreeing  with 
and  amenable  to  its  general  Church  organization.  In  this  way  the 
opportunity  is  offered  to  all  its  members  to  promote  the  missionary  work, 
with  the  same  free  choice  in  action,  the  same  safeguards  for  truth  and 
order,  the  same  responsibility  to  ecclesiastical  control,  the  same  immense 
power  resulting  from  oneness  of  views,  purity  of  doctrines,  aud  the 
indwelling  of  the  Spirit  of  Christ,  the  spirit  of  missions, — precisely 
the  same  abroad,  as  at  home ; in  the  Presbytery  of  Lodiana  as  in  the 
Presbytery  of  New  York. 

It  is  not  the  object,  however,  of  this  paper  to  discuss  the  question 

of  the  best  method  of  superintending  the  missionary  work ; and  for 
information  respecting  the  origin  of  the  Board,  I would  refer  the 
reader  to  the  late  venerable  Dr.  Ashbel  Green’s  Historical  Sketch  of 
Presbyterian  Missions.*  Those  who  have  read  this  little  volume  will 
need  no  recommendation  of  its  merits ; to  others,  it  may  be  commended 
as  a lucid  and  well-written  compend  of  information,  and  invaluable  as 
a book  of  reference. 

Before  surveying  the  missionary  fields  and  missions  of  the  Presby- 
terian Church,  it  may  gratify  some  readers,  if  we  show  in  what  way 
the  Board,  under  whose  charge  these  missions  are  placed,  fulfils  its 
sacred  trust. 

The  Board  consists  of  sixty  ministers,  and  as  many  laymen,  whose 
term  of  office  is  four  years.  Its  members  are  appointed  by  the  General 
Assembly,  one  fourth  part  each  year.  To  them  is  “ intrusted,  with 
such  directions  as  may  from  time  to  time  be  given,  the  superintendence 
of  the  foreign  missionary  operations  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  in 
the  United  States  of  America and  they  are  required  to  “ make 
annually  to  the  General  Assembly  a report  of  their  proceedings  ; and 
submit  for  its  approval  such  plans  and  measures  as  may  be  deemed  use- 
ful and  necessary.”  The  Board  is,  therefore,  simply  a Standing  Com- 
mittee of  the  General  Assembly,  and  the  title  of  Committee  would 
have  more  clearly  indicated  its  relations  to  that  venerable  court.  For 
convenience  in  holding  certain  real  estate  and  in  the  transaction  of 
some  kinds  of  business,  a charter  has  been  obtained  for  the  Board 
under  a general  law  of  the  State  of  New  York,  with  the  same  title 
precisely  as  designated  by  the  General  Assembly,  “The  Board  of 
Freign  Missions  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  in  the  United  States  of 
America.”  This  charter  is  not  a close  but  an  open  one,  and  the  mem- 
bers of  the  incorporated  body  are  the  same  persons,  and  no  others, 
who  are  appointed  as  members  of  the  Board  by  the  General  Assem- 
bly. 

The  Board  appoints  annually  an  Executive  Committee  and  the  Ex- 
ecutive Officers.  On  these  devolves  the  immediate  charge  of  the  mis- 

* A Historical  Sketch,  or  Compendious  View  of  Domestic  and  Foreign  Missions  in 
the  Presbyterian  Church.  By  Ashbel  Green,  D.D.  Philadelphia:  William  S.  Martien. 

1838. 

BOARD  OF  FOREIGN  MISSIONS.  11 


sionary  work.  Weekly  meetings  are  held  by  the  Committee,  at  which 
every  thing  relating  to  the  interests  of  the  missionary  cause  at  home  and 
abroad  may  be  brought  under  consideration.  The  selection  of  mission- 
ary fields,  the  appointment  of  missionaries,  the  kinds  of  labor  in  each 
country  and  at  each  station,  the  measures  suitable  for  promoting  an 
interest  in  the  missionary  work  among  the  churches  at  home,  receive 
continued  and  careful  attention.  Most  of  these  are  matters  of  deep 
importance.  They  require  the  exercise  of  enlarged  views  and  the  most 
sober  judgment.  A general  acquaintance  with  the  missionary  field, 
and  with  the  history  of  missions,  and  a particular  knowledge  of  the 
missionary  work  under  the  charge  of  the  Board,  are  required  for  the 
proper  decision  of  questions  that  occur  from  time  to  time.  An  appli- 
cation for  funds  to  build  a missionary  chapel,  or  a request  for  appoint- 
ment as  a missionary  or  teacher,  may  easily  bring  under  consideration 
the  whole  subject  of  the  best  method  of  expending  missionary  funds, 
in  view  both  of  the  exigences  of  the  various  missions  and  the  amount 
of  moneys  at  the  disposal  of  the  Committee. 

The  appointment  of  missionaries  is  one  of  the  most  important  of 
these  duties.  In  making  appointments  the  Committee  must  rely  very 
much  on  recommendations  of  pastors,  instructors,  and  others.  They 
are  anxious  to  send  forth  only  those  who  have  been  called  to  this  work 
by  the  Head  of  the  Church.  As  a part  of  the  evidence  of  this  divine 
call,  they  must  take  into  consideration  the  qualifications  of  the  appli- 
cant. His  reputation  for  piety,  prudence,  and  zeal,  his  talents  and 
scholarship,  his  health  and  its  adaptation  to  particular  climates,  are  all 
matters  of  great  moment.  Qualifications  of  a superior  class  are  great- 
ly to  be  desired ; but  men  of  respectable  talents,  with  good  judgment 
and  habits  of  industry  and  energy,  all  under  the  control  of  humble, 
loving,  and  devoted  piety,  may  be  very  useful  in  most  missionary  fields. 
It  may  well  be  doubted  whether  it  is  expedient  to  send  out  men  whose 
qualifications  are  not  fully  equal  to  the  average  attainments  of  the 
ministers  of  the  churches  in  this  country.  A rule  was- adopted  by  the 
Board,  at  the  request  of  the  Executive  Committee,  that  no  ordained 
minister  should  be  sent  to  a foreign  field,  without  the  recommendation 
of  his  Presbytery.  This  places  the  responsibility  of  deciding  on  the 
qualifications  of  missionaries,  to  a large  degree,  on  the  Presbyteries ; 


and  it  should  go  far  to  secure  the  right  kind  of  men.  But  the  nature 
of  the  work  itself,  and  the  sacrifices  which  it  involves,  will  always  fur- 
nish presumptive  evidence  that  the  brethren  who  offer  as  volunteers 
to  engage  in  it  are  men  worthy  of  confidence  and  honor. 

The  missionaries  become  members  of  the  Presbyteries  which  have 
been  organized  in  their  respective  fields  of  labor,  and  all  ecclesiastical 
matters  are  transacted  as  is  usual  in  these  church  courts.  With  these, 
the  Committee  do  not  interefere,  unless  by  Christian  counsel  at  the 
request  of  the  missionaries.  Financial  and  other  business  matters 
are  transacted  with  the  missionaries,  not  as  Presbyteries,  but  as  mis- 
sions or  sub-committees ; and  as  a general  rule  it  is  expedient  to  leave 
local  details  as  far  as  possible  in  their  hands.  The  general  super- 
vision must,  from  the  nature  of  the  case,  be  reserved  to  the  Commit- 
tee. This  is  particularly  necessary  in  the  expenditure  of  the  funds 
devoted  to  missionary  purposes.  Estimates  are  sent  up,  embracing  the 
various  kinds  of  work  in  each  mission — the  sum  desired  for  the  support 
of  missionaries  and  native  assistants,  for  building  churches,  chapels,  or 
schoolhouses,  for  schools,  for  the  press,  &c.,  being  separately  stated. 
In  forming  these  estimates,  the  missions  proceed  upon  the  expenses  of 
the  preceding  year  as  a basis,  with  such  enlargement  or  diminution 
as  may  be  called  for  by  their  circumstances  and  prospects.  With 
estimates  from  all  the  missions  before  them,  the  Committee  then  appor- 
tion to  each  such  part  of  the  probable  receipts  of  the  Board  as  the 
wants  of  each  mission  appear  to  require.  The  probable  income  to 
be  thus  apportioned  is  itself  a matter  of  estimate,  founded  upon  the 
income  of  the  preceding  year,  and  the  hope  of  enlarged  contributions 
by  the  churches  to  this  cause.  In  the  proper  fulfilment  of  their  trust  in 
these  financial  matters,  the  Committee  are  called  to  exercise  their  maturest 
judgment.  Errors  or  mistakes  here  would  involve  the  whole  work  in 
serious  difficulties.  W ere  expenditures  to  be  authorized  without  a strict 
regard  to  the  probable  means  of  payment,  a debt  would  soon  be  created, 
embarrassing  alike  to  friends  at  home  and  to  the  missionaries  abroad. 
On  the  other  hand,  it  is  no  easy  matter  to  withhold  aid  which  is  urgently 
solicited,  and  which  the  churches  are  so  well  able  to  give. 

The  arrangements  of  the  Board  for  the  receipt  and  expenditure  of 
the  funds  committed  to  its  charge  for  the  missionary  work,  are  thoroughly 


MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


12 


business-like  and  satisfactory.  Every  donation,  though  as  small  in 
amount  as  the  widow’s  two  mites,  can  be  traced  in  its  course  from  the 
time  it  leaves  its  donor’s  hands,  and  for  every  dollar  expended  a satis- 
factory exhibit  can  be  shown — all  being  on  record  in  books  kept  for 
the  purpose.  Y ouchers  are  preserved  for  all  moneys  expended.  It  is 
believed  that  nothing  has  been  at  any  time  lost  through  want  of  up- 
rightness or  fidelity.  Errors  of  judgment  there  may  have  been,  and  a 
consequent  injudicious  expenditure  of  money  in  some  cases.  To 
acknowledge  this  is  but  to  concede  that  the  Executive  Committee  and 
Officers  are  far  from  being  infallible  in  judgment.  But  it  is  no  small 
thing  to  be  able  to  say,  that  in  twenty  years,  out  of  an  expenditure 
amounting  altogether  to  more  than  a million  and  a half  of  dollars, 
nothing  has  been  lost  through  want  of  fidelity  on  the  part  of  those 
who  were  charged  with  its  disbursement.  The  further  merit  of  econo- 
my in  the  administration  of  the  funds  of  the  Board  may  be  justly 
claimed,  and  is  shown,  amongst  other  ways,  by  the  low  per  centage  of 
cost  for  executive  services. 

In  the  transmission  of  moneys  for  the  support  of  the  missionary  work 
abroad,  different  methods  are  adopted  for  missions  in  different  coun- 
tries. To  the  missions  among  the  Indian  tribes,  a large  amount  of 
“ supplies” — various  articles  of  clothing,  groceries,  books,  &c., — are  for- 
warded. These  can  be  purchased  at  much  lower  rates  in  our  cities 
than  in  the  Indian  country.  For  articles  purchased  in  the  neighborhood 
of  these  missionary  stations,  payments  are  commonly  made  by  drafts 
drawn  by  the  Treasurer  or  Superintendent  of  the  mission  on  the  Trea- 
surer in  New  York.  In  the  African  missions,  particularly  at  Corisco, 
money  is  less  convenient  than  some  kinds  of  merchandise,  and  accord- 
ingly supplies  are  sent  from  this  country.  To  the  missions  in  India, 
Siam,  and  China,  supplies  are  seldom  sent,  and  only  when  ordered  ; 
and  money  is  remitted,  commonly  by  letters  of  credit.  The  Trea- 
surer goes  down  into  Wall  street,  and  engages  a letter  of  credit  for, 
say,  five  hundred  pounds  sterling ; on  which  letter,  bills  of  exchange 
may  be  drawn,  payable  in  London  at  four  or  six  months  after  sight. 
This  letter  of  credit  is  forwarded  to  the  Treasurer  of  the  mission,  and 
bills  are  sold  by  him  at  the  prevailing  rates.  The  purchaser  sends 
the  bill  to  London,  where  it  arrives  in  some  five  or  six  months  after 


the  time  when  it  was  obtained  in  Wall  street,  and  four  or  six  months 
must  still  elapse,  after  it  is  presented  for  acceptance  by  the  parties  on 
whom  it  is  drawn,  before  it  becomes  payable  by  the  Treasurer  of  the 
Board,  making  altogether  ten  or  twelve  months  from  its  date  in  New 
York.  As  the  Board  must  in  due  time  pay  this  draft,  it  has  been  the 
good  practice  of  the  Committee  to  authorize,  at  the  time  of  engaging 
the  letter  of  credit,  the  investment  upon  ample  securities  of  money 
.bearing  interest,  so  as  to  be  in  no  danger  of  not  being  prepared  to  take 
it  up  when  it  becomes  due.  In  this  way,  not  only  is  safety  secured, 
but  the  interest  gained  in  the  meantime  on  the  money  invested  serves 
to  reduce  the  cost  of  the  bill,  or,  in  other  words,  to  diminish  the  expense 
of  remitting  funds  to  the  missions.  When  the  fluctuations  of  com- 
merce, war,  or  any  other  cause  render  it  difficult  to  sell  bills  of  exchange 
in  India  or  China,  it  then  becomes  necessary  to  send  out  silver.  This 
must  be  bought,  sometimes  at  a premium,  and  it  is  subject  to  expense 
for  freight  and  insurance,  while  on  the  voyage  it  is  earning  no  interest ; 
so  that  this  kind  of  remittance  is  seldom  a desirable  one. 

The  business  of  the  Board  is  transacted  mainly  in  the  city  of  New 
York.  This  city  has  become  the  chief  foreign  port  of  the  country, 
and  possesses  many  advantages  for  sending  forth  missionaries,  remitting 
fluids,  and  foreign  correspondence.  No  other  city  in  this  country 
affords  equal  facilities  for  these  purposes.  The  decision  to  establish  the 
business  head-quarters  of  the  Board  in  this  city  was  therefore  a mea- 
sure of  obvious  propriety.  Almost  the  only  drawback  to  the  desira- 
bleness of  this  location  grows  out  of  the  great  cost  of  living  in  New 
York.  This  renders  a somewhat  large  outlay  necessary  for  the  salaries 
of  the  Executive  Officers.  The  amount  paid  by  the  Board,  however, 
has  thus  far  at  no  time  equalled  the  actual  expenses  incurred  by  them 
for  their  support. 

For  offices,  the  liberality  of  a few  friends,  in  addition  to  the  collec- 
tions made  in  some  of  the  churches  in  1842,  has  provided  the  Mission 
House,  in  Centre  street.  The  place  at  first  occupied  as  an  office  was 
a room  in  the  Brick  Church  Chapel,  in  partnership  with  another  bene- 
volent institution.  This  was  soon  found  to  be  quite  too  confined  a 
place,  and  two  rooms  were  taken  on  the  third  floor  of  a building  at 
the  corner  of  Broadway  and  Murray  street.  The  growing  business  of 


BOARD  OF  FOREIGN  MISSIONS.  13 


the  Board  and  the  inconvenience  of  these  rooms  led  to  another  change, 
and  a part  of  a house  was  rented  in  City  Hall  Place,  where  the  office 


was  held  for  some  years.  These  rooms,  however,  were  not  well  suited 
to  the  use  of  the  Board  ; and  the  plan  of  renting  an  office  was  found 


to  be  expensive,  and  attended  with  the  risk  of  change  and  other  serious 
inconveniences.  It  is  therefore  a most  happy  thing  that  a house  con- 
veniently situated,  well  lighted,  sufficiently  large,  and  planned  for  its 
special  use,  is  now  owned  by  the  Board.  Its  offices  are  rent-free,  and 
are  better  suited  to  its  purposes  than  rented  rooms  at  almost  any  cost. 

In  the  Mission  House,  besides  the  Treasurer’s  and  Secretaries’  offices, 
there  are  apartments  for  packing  and  storing  goods  to  be  sent  to  the 
missions.  These  occupy  the  basement  story.  When  several  missionary 
families  are  about  to  sail,  their  trunks,  boxes,  parcels,  articles  of  fur- 
niture, &c.,  fill  up  these  apartments,  often  to  an  uncomfortable  degree ; 
and  both  the  economy  and  the  convenience  of  these  rooms  become 
quite  apparent.  To  rent  suitable  places  for  such  purposes,  when  mis- 
sionaries are  preparing  to  embark,  would  always  be  attended  with  much 
expense,  and  might  often  be  found  impracticable. 

The  rooms  devoted  to  the  Museum,  in  the  third  story,  contain  a rare 
variety  of  idol  gods  and  goddesses,  from  India,  Siam,  China,  Africa, 
and  other  heathen  countries,  besides  numerous  other  objects  of  interest. 
This  collection  is  gradually  increasing  in  extent  and  value,  and  is 
worthy  of  attention  by  the  friends  of  missions.  Visitors  are  admitted 
at  any  time,  on  application  to  the  officers  or  clerks  in  the  House. 

A large  room  is  occupied  by  the  Library.  The  books  here  collected 
number  about  2000  volumes,  mostly  relating  directly  or  indirectly 
to  the  work  of  missions.  They  include  numerous  translations  of  the 
Sacred  Scriptures,  Dictionaries  and  Grammars  of  foreign  languages, 
Beports  and  Periodicals  of  Missionary  Institutions  in  bound  volumes, 
Memoirs  of  Missionaries,  works  on  the  Indians,  on  Africa,  India,  China, 
&c.  They  form  a collection  of  very  considerable  value,  and  one  which 
should  be  gradually  enlarged. 

A number  of  works  by  Chinese  authors  occupy  a recess  in  the 
same  room.  This  is  probably  the  only  library  of  the  kind  in  this 
country.  It  consists  of  about  1000  volumes,  of  which  400  are  but 
one  work,  “ The  Twenty-Four  Histories and  another  work,  “A  Uni- 
versal Encyclopaedia,”  with  maps,  diagrams,  and  sketches,  extends  to 
120  volumes.  “ The  Five  Classics”  number  104  volumes,  and  a second 
series,  under  a similar  title,  contains  22  volumes.  These  are  all  in  octavo, 
as  are  works  on  Botany,  Descriptions  of  particular  districts,  Accounts 


14  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


of  kings  and  emperors,  Dictionaries,  &c.,  besides  some  works  of  smaller 
size.  The  whole  collection  gives  a striking  view  of  the  extent  of 
Chinese  literature,  and  makes  one  sigh  over  the  strange  language  which 
renders  its  stores  inaccessible  to  most  readers.  Yet  for  reference  these 
volumes  may  prove  of  great  service.  They  were  collected  by  the  late 
lamented  Mr.  Olyphant,  a merchant  in  the  China  trade,  for  some  years 
a most  valued  member  of  the  Executive  Committee,  and  by  his  charac- 
teristic liberality  they  occupy  a place  in  the  Mission  House  Library. 

In  other  rooms  are  kept  the  bound  volumes  of  Letters  received  at 
the  missionary  office.  These  are  arranged  according  to  date.  All  from 
correspondents  in  this  country  are  classified  under  Domestic,  and  those 
from  the  missionaries  are  placed  under  the  head  of  the  Missions.  Thus, 
the  volume  labelled,  “ Domestic — January  to  June,  1853,”  includes  the 
home  letters  received  in  those  months  ; and  the  volume  labelled,  “ India 
Letters,  Lodiana,  1847-51,”  contains  the  letters  from  the  Lodiana  Mis- 
sion in  that  time.  Each  volume  has  an  index,  making  reference  easy. 
There  are  upwards  of  sixty  of  these  thick  volumes,  and  each  year 


steadily  increases  the  number.  In  addition  to  these  are  many  volumes, 
consisting  exclusively  of  letters  relating  to  the  Missionary  Chronicle 
formerly  published,  and  to  the  Foreign  Missionary.  The  copies  of 
letters  sent  from  the  office  fill  several  volumes  more.  And  the  Trea- 
surer’s books  of  account,  of  various  kinds,  form  still  another  class, 
second  to  none  in  their  importance.  A copy  of  every  letter  with  re- 
mittances of  money  to  the  missions,  and  every  letter  containing  remit- 
tances from  the  churches  or  individuals  to  the  treasury,  will  be  found 
among  these  volumes. 

Matters  of  business,  which  to  some  readers  may  seem  to  be  without 
interest,  have  chiefly  occupied  this  chapter.  But  all  will  acknow- 
ledge their  practical  importance.  The  healthful  action  of  all  the  mis- 
sions, and  the  confidence  of  the  churches,  alike  depend  largely  on  the 
efficient  and  responsible  management  of  the  pecuniary  affairs  of  the 
Board.  Yet  these  are  but  the  scaffolding.  The  temple  is  every 
thing. 


Y 


VfirU1  i -] 

\\rakenA 


p -^•Scopa.xixS  ' 
^^xnxj^/cohixnt^ 


^ytftpTE  arth  R 


fa  in1 


nmie 


I Or'ea/QJp; 

vioZtZpl 


TJt  alls 


I C^nsas  It 


;tWo  -fc  Trflij 


Pai-trtats 


nJrkczJ  t ■!<’<? 


ii»Va"&  StegSE^ 

. — • 

alvissee 

Siu-O" 


*£crna  <• 


Gila 


'isieJe 


C ^JtrencJi 


Vro/'-  (a Jit?  l’asttn/m!l.]faf>  ^ 


m 


■ arCrr-,- S'-  Co  i'i  Y 


II. 

MISSIONS  AMONG  THE  INDIAN  TRIBES. 

“Eiss  tJiat  Sine!1  Jit  ti)e  fcfltrcrness  *|:a!l  tain  before 


The  Indians  of  our  day  may  be  divided  into  two  classes, — those  who 
are  now  partially  civilized,  and  live  in  a somewhat  settled  state,  and 
those  who  are  yet  savages.  It  is  among  the  former  that  our  missionary 
stations  are  chiefly  found.  Indeed,  their  partial  civilization  must  be 
ascribed  in  no  small  measure  to  the  influence  of  Christian  missions.* 
These  tribes  are  mostly  the  remnants  of  once  powerful  nations.  Some 
of  them  are  found  in  the  western  part  of  New  York,  others  in  Michi- 
gan, but  the  larger  part  live  in  the  territory  west  of  the  Mississippi 
river,  known  as  the  Indian  Reservation.  This  Reservation  lies  imme- 
diately west  of  the  States  of  Arkansas  and  Missouri,  between  Red 
river  on  the  south  and  Platte  river  on  the  north — a territory  about 
three  hundred  miles  in  breadth,  by  five  hundred  miles  in  length,  from 
north  to  south.  The  General  Government  has  set  apart  this  country 
for  the  exclusive  use  of  the  Indians.  It  is  of  unequal  fertility,  but 
embraces  a large  amount  of  choice  land,  and  it  enjoys  the  great  advan- 
tage of  being  penetrated  or  bordered  by  several  noble  rivers.  Here 
are  collected — beginning  our  enumeration  at  the  south,  and  proceeding 
northward — Chickasaws,  Choctaws,  Creeks,  Seminoles,  Cherokees,  Osa- 
ges,  Wyandots,  Potawatomies,  Weas  and  Piankeshaws,  Peorias  and 

* For  a valuable  and  interesting  collection  of  evidence  taken  before  a Committee  of 
the  British  House  of  Commons,  showing  that  Christian  missions  confer  the  greatest  tem- 
poral benefits  on  the  people  amongst  whom  they  are  established,  see  a volume  entitled, 
“ Christianity  the  Means  of  Civilization.”  London,  1837. 


Kaskaskias,  Ottawas  and  Chippewas,  Shawnees,  Kanzas,  Delawares, 
Kickapoos,  Iowas,  Foxes  and  Sacs,  Otoes  and  Missouries.  Immediately 
north  of  the  Reservation,  the  Omahas  and  other  tribes  have  an  uncer- 
tain abode. 

Most  of  the  Indians  in  this  Territory  belong  to  tribes  which  former- 
ly lived  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  Mississippi ; some  of  them  in  the 
Atlantic  States.  The  Cherokees  dwelt  in  Georgia ; the  Choctaws,  in 
Mississippi;  the  Creeks,  partly  in  Alabama.  The  interests  of  the 
people  of  these  States  were  supposed  to  require  the  removal  of  the 
Indians  out  of  their  bounds,  a measure  not  to  be  justified  on  any  other 
ground  than  that  of  stern  necessity.  It  may  well  be  questioned  whether 
this  plea  should  have  been  admitted.  The  happy  working  of  a Chris- 
tian policy  towards  the  Indians  has  been  shown  in  the  State  of  Michi- 
gan, where  laws  were  passed  by  the  Legislature  to  facilitate  their 
becoming  citizens.  This  humane  and  enlightened  policy  has  wrought 
no  evil  to  the  State,  while  it  is  gradually  leading  many  of  the  Indians 
to  become  owners  of  small  farms,  and  to  support  themselves  and  their 
families  by  honest  industry.  But  these  liberal  views  were  not  preva- 
lent at  the  period  when  the  removal  of  the  Cherokees  and  other  south- 
ern tribes  was  enforced.  The  measure  was  carried  through  at  the 
urgent  instance  of  the  States,  by  the  power  of  the  General  Govern- 
ment, with  as  much  humanity  as  the  severe  circumstances  of  the  case 
would  permit,  but  unquestionably  with  very  great  suffering  to  the  poor 


16  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


Indians.  Yet  good  has  been  brought  out  of  this  great  evil.  The 
Indians,  in  their  new  abodes,  are  under  the  protection  of  the  General 
Government,  dwell  in  peace,  and  enjoy  many  opportunities  of  improve- 
ment. Considerable  sums  of  money  are  paid  to  many  of  these  tribes 
in  annuities,  as  a compensation  for  the  lands  formerly  held  by  them ; 
and  these  annuities  are  partly  expended  in  the  support  of  schools. 
Several  of  the  tribes  enjoyed  the  instructions  of  missionaries  previous 
to  their  removal,  and  they  are  now  fairly  entered  on  the  march  of  civil- 
ization. Their  numbers  are  beginning  to  increase,  which  is  a sure 
sign  that  they  are  becoming  free  from  the  wasting  habits  of  savage 
life. 

Besides  the  partially  civilized  tribes  in  the  Indian  Territory,  there 
are  some  small  bands  in  the  States  of  New  York  and  Michigan,  whose 
progress  in  the  arts  of  peace  may  be  rated  at  a similar  grade.  Some 
of  the  Indian  families  in  New  Mexico,  particularly  the  Pueblos,  live 
in  a somewhat  settled  way ; and  the  Indians  of  California,  it  is  believed, 
could  be  induced,  by  the  adoption  of  suitable  measures,  involving  some 
expense  at  first  to  the  General  Government,  to  group  themselves  on 
reservations  of  land,  and  under  the  care  of  missionaries  to  engage  in 
the  cultivation  of  the  soil.  It  would  cost  infinitely  less  of  money  and 
of  effort  to  provide  in  this  way  for  the  civilization  of  those  Indians, 
and  thus  to  make  them  useful  citizens,  than  to  employ  a military  force 
for  their  restraint  or  punishment.  Which  method  of  dealing  with  an 
ignorant  heathen  people  by  a great  Christian  nation  would  be  most 
humane  and  praiseworthy,  it  requires  no  argument  to  show. 

The  other  general  class  of  Indians  are  those  who  are  yet  addicted  to 
the  ways  of  savage  life.  Numerous  tribes  are  still  found  ranging  over 
the  vast  tracts  of  country  lying  east  and  west  of  the  Rocky  Mountains. 
These  tribes  differ  greatly  from  each  other;  some,  like  the  Caman 
ches,  being  numerous  and  fierce,  living  by  war  and  violence  as  well  as 
by  the  chase ; others,  like  the  poor  Root-diggers,  being  objects,  not  of 
terror,  but  of  pity.  Amongst  these  wandering  and  savage  tribes  no 
missionary  station  is  to  be  found.  And  it  deserves  serious  considera- 
tion, whether  any  thing  can  be  done  for  them.  It  must  surely  be 
expected  that  some  way  of  carrying  to  them  the  story  of  the  cross  will 
be  presented.  The  streams  of  emigration  to  Oregon  and  California  are 


now  flowing  through  these  Indian  hunting-grounds,  and  our  country- 
men are  in  almost  feverish  expectation  of  railway  travelling  across  the 
continent.  May  these  signs  of  the  times  betoken  the  blessings  of  the 
gospel,  carried  by  the  churches  of  this  land  to  these  long-neglected 
tribes ! 

The  first  Indian  mission,  commenced  in  1833  by  the  Western  Foreign 
Missionary  Society,  which  was  the  germ  of  the  Board  of  Foreign 
Missions  of  the  Presbyterian  Church,  was  established  amongst  the 
Weas,  a small  band,  occupying  a part  of  the  Indian  Territory,  near 
its  northern  boundary.  With  this  mission  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Joseph 
Kerr  and  Wells  Bushnell,  and  their  wives,  were  connected,  and  several 
male  and  female  teachers.  The  Rev.  William  D.  Smith  had  previously 
made  an  interesting  exploring  tour  amongst  the  tribes  on  the  Missouri, 
which  led  to  the  formation  of  the  Wea  mission.  Encouraging  success 
followed  the  labors  of  the  missionaries ; a church  was  organized,  and  a 
number  of  native  converts  added  to  its  communion ; but  the  mission 
was  relinquished  after  a few  years,  partly  on  account  of  the  failure  of 
health  and  removal  of  some  of  the  brethren,  and  chiefly  because  a 
mission  had  been  afterwards  formed  by  another  denomination  amongst 
a small  neighboring  and  kindred  band.  As  the  number  of  Weas  was 
but  some  two  or  three  hundred,  and  their  kinsmen  were  hardly  more 
numerous,  it  was  a measure  of  questionable  propriety  to  form  a sepa- 
rate mission  among  the  latter  band ; but  this  having  been  done,  it  then 
appeared  to  be  inexpedient  to  maintain  the  Wea  mission,  and  the 
laborers  who  had  health  to  remain  were  transferred  to  the  Iowa  tribe. 
Some  of  the  noblest  examples  of  self-denying  and  faithful  missionary 
labor,  and  some  of  the  brightest  displays  of  the  power  of  divine  grace, 
were  witnessed  in  the  brief  history  of  the  mission  amongst  this  little 
tribe. 

The  Indian  missions  of  the  Board  are  found  now  among  the  Chicka- 
saws,  Choctaws,  Creeks,  and  Seminoles,  occupying  the  southern  part 
of  the  Indian  Territory ; the  Iowas  and  Sacs,  near  the  northern  part ; 
the  Omahas  and  Otoes,  in  the  vicinity  of  Council  Bluffs,  on  the  Mis- 
souri river ; and  some  bands  of  the  Chippewas  and  Ottawas,  on  Grand 
and  Little  Traverse  bays,  Michigan. 

The  Iowa  and  Sac  mission  is  the  oldest  on  this  list,  having  been 


MISSIONS  AMONG  THE  INDIAN  TRIBES-  17 


formed  in  1835.  These  Indians  live  near  the  northern  boundary  of  the 
Indian  Territory,  and  the  river  Missouri  separates  them  from  the  white 
settlements.  The  lowas  numbered  about  1100  souls,  and  the  Sacs 
500,  when  the  mission  was  first  commenced  amongst  them.  Owing  to 
the  prevalence  of  intemperance,  especially  among  the  lowas,  their 
numbers  have  been  decreasing:  only  about  750  were  enumerated  in 
1847,  and  but  437  in  1853.  Their  vicinity  to  the  settlements  of  white 
people  has  proved  a serious  drawback  to  their  improvement.  For 
several  years  the  whiskey-trade  was  carried  on  with  little  restraint,  and 
it  is  still  too  easy  for  the  besotted  Indians  to  cross  over  the  river  and 
seek  their  most  deadly  enemy.  Amongst  the  demons  of  our  race,  a 
front  rank  must  be  assigned  to  the  whiskey-traders  on  the  borders  of 
the  white  and  Indian  settlements.  They  have  carried  on  their  destruc- 
tive business  in  defiance  of  the  laws  of  God  and  man,  tempted  by  its 
enormous  gains.  An  Indian  has  been  known  to  exchange  a good  horse 
for  a small  keg  of  whiskey.  The  authorities  of  the  Government  have 
endeavored  to  prevent  this  demoralizing  traffic  with  the  Indians,  but  it 
is  a difficult  thing  to  restrict  it.  Its  influence  on  the  poor  lowas  has 
been  most  debasing.  They  are  becoming  fewer  in  number,  dispirited  and 
degraded.  The  Sacs  are  a more  sober  and  industrious  tribe,  but  they 
are  equally  indifferent  to  the  gospel. 

The  missionaries  have  prosecuted  their  work  steadily  in  the  face  of 
great  discouragements,  and  at  times  in  the  midst  of  serious  perils  to 
life,  owing  to  the  excitement  and  quarrels  of  the  Indians  under  the 
influence  of  intoxicating  liquor.  When  sober  they  regard  the  breth- 
ren as  their  best  friends,  and  place  the  greatest  confidence  in  them. 

Preaching  and  visiting  from  lodge  to  lodge  have  occupied  much 
time  and  attention,  but  without  much  visible  fruit.  It  would  seem  that 
but  little  good  can  be  done  to  the  adult  part  of  these  tribes.  For  the 
children,  schools  have  been  opened.  For  several  years  a day-school 
was  maintained,  attended  by  from  forty  to  fifty  scholars.  In  1846  a 
boarding-school  was  established,  a large  building  having  been  erected 
for  this  purpose.  In  this  school  the  number  of  scholars  has  been  from 
thirty  to  forty.  In  this  department  of  their  work  the  missionaries 
find  their  chief  encouragement. 

The  language  of  the  lowas  was  reduced  to  writing,  a grammar  pre- 


pared, a small  printing-press  set  up  in  1843,  portions  of  the  Scriptures 
translated,  a hymn-book  and  some  elementary  books  published.  Efforts 
have  not  been  largely  extended  in  this  line,  however,  as  it  is  deemed 
more  important  to  teach  the  children  to  read  the  English  language. 
For  a full  account  of  the  mission,  the  reader  will  consult  the  Annual 
Reports  of  the  Board ; and  these  will  convey  a strong  impression  of 
the  self-denial,  industry,  patience,  and  faith,  with  which  the  mission- 
aries have  continued  year  after  year  in  this  discouraging  field.  Their 
labors  have  not  been  in  vain.  A few  converts  have  been  admitted  to 
the  church,  one  of  whom  finished  her  course  in  1847,  being  supported 
by  a good  hope  through  grace. 

According  to  the  Report  of  this  year,  1854,  this  mission  has  one 
station,  one  ordained  missionary,  one  male  and  three  female  assistant 
missionaries,  twenty  three  boys  and  twenty  one  girls  in  boarding-schools. 

Next  in  date  is  the  Chippewa  and  Ottawa  mission,  which  was 
commenced  in  1838.  Reserving  a somewhat  full  account  of  this  suc- 
cessful mission  for  a later  place  in  this  paper,  I will  only  give  here  the 
numerical  statistics  contained  in  the  Report  of  this  year,  1854.  It 
has  three  stations,  one  ordained  missionary,  nine  male  and  female  as- 
sistant missionaries,  a church  embracing  over  thirty  communicants, 
buildings  and  arrangements  for  a boarding-school  completed,  with 
forty-six  scholars,  and  sixty  scholars  in  day-schools. 

The  mission  among  the  Creeks  was  commenced  by  the  Rev.  Robert 
M.  Loughridge  in  1842,  under  circumstances  of  peculiar  interest ; and 
its  progress  has  been  marked  by  the  favor  of  Heaven.  The  district 
of  country  occupied  by  the  Creeks  lies  west  of  the  State  of  Arkansas, 
in  the  Indian  Territory,  between  the  Choctaw  district  on  the  south, 
and  the  Cherokee  on  the  north.  Their  number  is  over  20,000  souls. 
They  are  advancing  in  the  knowledge  of  agriculture  and  the  simpler 
mechanic  arts.  Missionaries  had  been  stationed  among  them  in  for- 
mer years  by  several  Societies,  but  they  had  been  required  to  leave  the 
Indian  country  by  the  chiefs ; and  for  some  years  previous  to  Mr.  Loughr 
ridge’s  visit  to  them,  this  large  tribe  had  been  destitute  of  missionary 
laborers.  Mr.  Loughridge  spent  some  months  during  the  winter  of 


18  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


1841  and  1842  in  the  Creek  country,  visiting  the  leading  chiefs  and 
the  different  settlements  in  the  nation,  and  he  thus  gained  their  confi- 
dence and  good-will.  The  result  was  a kind  of  treaty,  a written  agree- 
ment signed  by  both  parties,  giving  him  permission  “ to  establish  a 
mission  at  some  suitable  point,  with  a school,  to  be  under  the  control 
of  the  mission ; but  preaching  to  be  only  at  the  mission  station,  and 
the  number  of  missionaries  not  to  exceed  four  at  the  commencement ; 
the  missionaries  not  to  interfere  with  the  government  schools  or  the 
national  affairs ; the  chiefs  to  afford  their  countenance  and  protection, 
and  the  use  of  as  much  land  as  may  be  wanted  for  the  mission  families.” 
The  proviso  concerning  interference  with  their  schools  and  public 
affairs  was  probably  inserted  with  reference  to  the  events  of  former 
years. 

Early  in  1843,  Mr.  Loughridge  with  his  wife  reached  the  Indian 
country  again,  and  met  with  a most  cordial  reception.  A log-house 
was  built  for  his  family,  and  another  for  a school-house.  The  station 
was  called  Kowetah,  and  is  twenty-five  miles  west  of  the  eastern  bound- 
ary, and  eight  miles  from  the  northern.  On  the  Sabbath,  religious  ser- 
vices were  held,  and  a school  was  taught  during  the  week ; the  attend- 
ance at  both,  and  the  interest  evinced  in  them,  were  encouraging.  A 
boarding-school  was  commenced  in  1845,  at  first  with  twenty  scholars. 
A church  was  organized  in  January  of  the  same  year.  A second  sta- 
tion was  formed  at  Tallahassee,  sixteen  miles  east  of  Kowetah,  in  1848, 
and  a large  building  erected  for  a boarding-school.  A day-school  was 
opened  at  the  Agency,  two  miles  east  of  Tallahassee,  which  was  transfer- 
red to  that  station,  and  afterwards  relinquished.  The  boarding-schools  at 
the  two  stations  contained  for  some  time  one  hundred  and  twenty 
scholars,  in  equal  numbers  of  boys  and  girls ; there  are  still  eighty 
pupils  at  Tallahassee,  but  the  number  at  Kowetah,  owing  to  various 
causes,  has  been  reduced.  These  schools  have  proved  a means  of  great 
good  to  the  youth  connected  with  them.  A considerable  number  of 
the  scholars  have  become  members  of  the  church;  “times  of  refresh- 
ing from  the  presence  of  the  Lord”  have  caused  the  hearts  of  the  mis- 
sionaries to  rejoice  in  their  work,  many  of  their  beloved  scholars 
having  sought  and  found  the  way  of  life.  No  one  of  the  Indian  mis- 
sions of  the  Board  has  been  more  honored  in  the  hopeful  conversion 


of  souls.  Some  of  the  converts,  as  well  as  of  the  missionaries,  have 
died  in  the  triumphs  of  faith.  Two  young  men,  formerly  pupils  in  the 
school,  have  been  taken  under  the  care  of  the  Presbytery  as  candidates 
for  the  ministry.  And  the  missionary  work  is  still  going  on  with 
marked  encouragement  and  success. 

This  mission,  according  to  the  Report  of  this  year,  1854,  now  con- 
sists of  two  stations,  two  ordained  missionaries,  nine  male  and  female 
and  two  native  assistant  missionaries,  fifty-five  communicants,  and  one 
hundred  and  twenty  scholars  in  boarding-schools. 

One  of  the  most  important  of  these  missions  is  the  institution  called 
Spencer  Academy,  among  the  Choctaws.  This  was  placed  under  the 
charge  of  the  Board  by  the  Council  of  the  nation,  in  1845. 

Christian  missions  were  commenced  among  the  Choctaws  by  the 
American  Board,  in  the  year  1818,  while  these  Indians  were  living  east 
of  the  Mississippi.  Under  the  labors  of  devoted  missionaries  the  hap- 
piest fruits  were  beginning  to  appear,  before  the  removal  of  the  tribe 
from  their  former  lands.  These  fruits  were  not  altogether  lost  at  the 
time  of  their  reluctant  and  afflicting  change  of  abode.  They  were 
accompanied  to  their  new  homes  by  their  best  friends,  the  missiona- 
ries—some  of  whom  were  permitted  to  continue  long  in  their  work  of 
faith  and  labor  of  love.  The  names  of  Kingsbury,  Byington,  and 
Wright,  will  be  ever  regarded  as  amongst  the  greatest  benefactors  of 
this  people.  One  of  these  fathers,  the  Rev.  Alfred  Wright,  has  been 
lately  called  to  his  rest ; but  before  his  death,  and  while  a member  of 
the  General  Assembly  which  met  at  Charleston,  S.  C.,  in  1852,  he  could 
speak  of  more  than  eleven  hundred  church  members,  he  himself  being 
the  pastor  of  a church  of  nearly  three  hundred  communicants.  The 
Scriptures  also  have  been  translated  into  the  Choctaw  language. 

The  Choctaw  people  are  no  longer  to  be  classed  among  the  ruder 
tribes,  though  doubtless  many  of  them  are  far  from  having  reached  the 
standard  of  a Christian  civilization,  and  still  more,  alas ! have  not  be- 
come Christians  even  in  profession.  Yet  in  1846  they  were  described 
as  “ all  living  on  farms,  and  sustaining  themselves  by  cultivating  the 
soil.  Many  of  their  farms  and  cabins  are  small,  yet  not  more  so  than 
is  found  in  every  new  settlement  of  our  western  forests.  But  many  of 
their  farms  are  well  improved  and  the  buildings  good.  Their  country 


MISSIONS  AMONG  T 


has  in  it  abundance  of  good  land,  and  stock  is  easily  raised.  On  their 
farms  many  families  are  living  comfortably,  who  are  wholly  Indian, 
and  cannot  speak  a word  of  English.  They  are  destitute,  in  these 
scattered  abodes,  of  stated  preaching  : and  they  need  schools  and 
teachers  in  the  different  neighborhoods.” 

The  Choctaws  have  now  an  organized  government,  consisting  of  a 
Legislative  Council,  and  Courts  of  Justice,  with  an  excellent  Code  of 
Laws.  In  the  administration  of  their  civil  affairs  they  would  not  suf- 
fer by  comparison  with  some  of  their  white  neighbors,  if  indeed  their 
proceeding's  would  not  put  to  the  blush  “ the  law  and  order”  main- 
tained in  some  of  our  States.  In  one  important  matter  they  are  greatly 
in  advance  of  many  of  the  States,— they  have  made  a most  liberal  pro- 
vision for  the  education  of  their  children.  They  expend  upwards  of 
$20,000  annually  for  this  object,  or  a sum  equal  to  a tax  for  educa- 
tion alone  of  about  one  dollar  to  each  person.  This  money  is  paid 
out  of  their  annuities  from  the  Government. 

In  the  expenditure  of  their  funds  for  education,  the  Choctaws  natu- 
rally and  wisely  availed  themselves  of  the  help  of  their  missionary 
friends;  and  they  adopted  the  system  of  boarding-schools.  Appro- 
priations of  money  were  made  for  the  erection  of  buildings,  and  for 
the  current  expenses  in  part  of  several  schools  of  this  class,  which  were 
placed  under  the  charge  of  the  American  Board,  the  Methodist  and 
the  Baptist  Missionary  Societies.  The  Missionary  Societies  provide 
the  teachers,  books,  &e.,  and  also  the  board  and  clothing  of  a certain 
number  of  scholars,  involving  on  their  part  an  expenditure  estimated 
at  about  one-fourth  more  than  the  amount  received  from  the  Indians. 
The  Council  reserved  one  institution  for  their  own  control,  intending 
to  make  Spencer  Academy  neither  a local  nor  a missionary  school,  but 
one  which  should  receive  scholars  from  all  parts  of  the  nation,  to  be 
trained  under  a superintendent  and  teachers  appointed  by  the  Indian 
authorities.  The  Academy  was  projected  in  1842,  and  endowed  with  an 
appropriation  of  $6,000  p(jr  annum  from  their  own  funds,  and  $2,000 
from  the  Indian  Department.  A reservation  of  land  has  been  set 
apart  for  its  use,  which,  however,  is  too  sterile  to  admit  of  profitable 
cultivation,  though  it  furnishes  fuel  and  partial  advantages  for  farming. 
Buildings  for  the  accommodation  of  one  hundred  scholars  are  placed 


HE  INDIAN  TRIBES.  19 


in  the  centre  of  the  reservation.  The  Academy  was  opened  in  Febru- 
ary, 1844,  with  sixty  pupils,  and  the  average  number  while  it  continued 
under  the  direction  of  the  Council  was  seventy-five. 

After  trial,  serious  difficulties  were  found  to  attend  the  actual  work- 
ing of  the  institution  as  originally  planned, — difficulties  relating  to  its 
expenses,  instruction,  and  government.  The  Council  therefore  proposed 
to  transfer  the  charge  of  this  Academy  to  the  Board,  on  the  condition 
of  the  Board  contributing  $2,000  per  annum  to  its  support.  This  was 
an  unexpected  sphere  of  missionary  labor,  and  in  view  of  the  import- 
ance of  having  the  youth  connected  with  the  Academy  under  Chris- 
tian influence,  the  Committee  could  not  long  hesitate  to  accept  the 
trust.  The  mission  was  commenced  under  the  charge  of  the  Bev. 
James  B.  Bamsey,  as  superintendent,  in  1846.  Mr.  Bamsey’s  health 
having  become  impaired,  he  resigned  this  post,  and  was  succeeded  in 
1850  by  the  present  superintendent,  the  Bev.  Alexander  Beid.  To 
the  devoted  services  of  these  brethren  and  their  associates,  the  Choc- 
taws are  greatly  indebted  ; but  for  the  detailed  history  of  the  mission, 
reference  must  be  made  to  the  Annual  Beports  of  the  Board.  It  is  a 
mission  which  requires  a great  amount  of  labor,  both  at  the  station 
and  at  the  Mission  House.  It  has  met  with  difficulties,  losses,  opposi- 
tion, and  sad  bereavements.  One  of  the  most  severe  bereavements 
was  the  death  of  the  Bev.  Alexander  J.  Graham,  a young  minister  of 
superior  endowments  and  devoted  piety.  Yet  this  mission  has  already 
accomplished  a great  and  blessed  work,  and  it  is  now  in  full  progress, 
under  gratifying  circumstances,  and  with  very  favorable  prospects.  I 
will  only  add,  to  show  the  exemption  of  the  Board  from  any  just  charge 
of  seeking  their  own  things  instead  of  the  benefit  of  the  Indians,  that 
while  the  stipulated  number  of  pupils  is  one  hundred,  the  actual  num- 
ber has  always  been  considerably  larger,  and  last  year  amounted  to  one 
hundred  and  thirty  ; and  while  the  agreement  between  the  Board  and 
the  Council  requires  an  expenditure  of  $2,000  per  annum  by  the  for- 
mer over  the  amount  received  from  the  latter,  the  sum  actually  ex- 
pended has  averaged  over  $3,100  per  year  above  the  amount  received. 
This,  however,  is  a very  small  sum  to  be  expended  by  the  Church  of 
Christ  towards  securing  the  Christian  education  of  more  than  one  hun- 
dred Choctaw  youths,  the  flower  of  their  nation,  the  magistrates,  legis- 


1 

1 

20  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 

lators,  and  professional  men  of  their  generation.  May  they  be  found 
the  true  disciples  of  Jesus ! 

Religious  services  are  conducted  at  the  station,  and  at  neighboring 
places,  on  the  Sabbath  ; and  during  the  vacations  of  the  Academy,  the 
gospel  has  been  preached  in  more  distant  parts  of  the  Indian  country. 
These  labors  have  not  been  in  vain  in  the  Lord.  Some  have  been  led 
to  put  their  trust  in  Jesus  Christ  for  salvation ; and  a church  was 
organized  in  1847,  to  which  a number  of  native  members  have  been 
added.  The  changes  at  the  station,  some  leaving  every  year  whose 
places  are  supplied  by  others,  have  tended  to  prevent  satisfactory  re- 
tons  of  the  number  of  members  connected  with  the  church ; but  the 
youth  converted  here  may  be  expected  to  become  members  of  churches 
in  other  places,  and  thus  their  Christian  influence  will  be  widely 
extended. 

According  to  the  Report  of  this  year,  1854,  the  force  employed  in 
this  mission  consisted  of  one  ordained  missionary,  and  thirteen  male 
and  female  assistant  missionaries. 

The  attention  of  the  Board  was  directed  to  the  Otoes  and  Omahas 
for  some  years  before  it  was  found  practicable  to  establish  a mission 
among  them.  Arrangements  were  made  to  receive  some  of  their  chil- 
dren into  the  boarding-school  among  the  Iowas,  but  their  fears  pre- 
vented any  thing  being  done  in  this  way.  In  the  autumn  of  1846,  the 
Rev.  Edmund  M 'Kinney  and  his  wife  removed  from  the  Iowa  station 
to  Bellevue,  in  the  neighborhood  of  Council  Bluffs,  on  the  Missouri 
river, — a place  which  afforded  convenient  access  to  the  Otoes  and 
Omahas.  A building  of  hewn  logs  was  completed  in  the  spring  of 
1848.  It  is  two  stories  high,  sixty-four  feet  in  front  by  twenty-eight 
in  width,  with  two  side  wings  of  proportional  size,  and  is  well  suited 
for  a missionary  family  and  boarding-school.  Besides  conducting  reli- 
gious services  on  the  Sabbath,  the  missionary  has  the  charge  of  the 
school.  The  number  of  scholars  has  varied  from  twenty-five  to  forty- 
five,  of  both  sexes,  including  the  children  of  Otoes,  Omahas,  Pawnees, 
Puncas,  and  half-breeds.  The  mission  family  and  school  have  been 
repeatedly  visited  with  sickness,  and  it  has  been  found  extremely  diffi- 
cult to  procure  servants  for  household  work.  For  several  years  the 
mission  was  seriously  embarrassed  by  the  changes  and  the  inadequate 

supply  of  assistant  missionaries.  Its  prospects  are  now  more  favorable, 
although  Mr.  M’Kinney  felt  constrained  by  the  health  of  himself  and 
family  to  withdraw  during  the  last  year  from  this  field  of  labor.  His 
place  has  been  supplied  by  the  transfer  of  the  Rev.  William  Hamilton 
and  his  wife  from  the  Iowa  mission,  who  are  aided  by  a teacher  and 
his  wife,  a female  teacher,  and  a farmer  and  his  wife,  all  lately  appointed, 
and  entering  on  their  work  with  fine  qualifications  for  its  duties.  The 
friends  of  these  poor  Indians  may  hope  that  brighter  days  are  now  to 
shine  upon  them.  The  past  labors  of  the  mission  have  not  indeed  been 
without  fruit ; and  the  example  of  self-denial,  patient  endurance  of 
suffering,  and  perseverance  in  discouraging  circumstances,  should  be 
of  great  price  to  a church  whose  members  are  generally  living  in  the 
enjoyment  of  abundant  earthly  comfort ; but  we  may  now  look  for 
more  direct  returns  from  the  labor  expended  on  this  field  than  have 
yet  been  afforded,  if  only  faith  and  prayer  do  not  fail. 

The  numbers,  character,  and  condition  of  these  remnants  of  once 
powerful  tribes  were  thus  described  in  former  Annual  Reports  of  the 
Board : 

“ The  Otoes  are  divided  into  six  bands,  and  number  1166.  They 
are  much  esteemed  by  the  neighboring  tribes  for  their  daring  spirit, 
both  in  war  and  the  chase ; but  their  moral  character  is  far  from  being 
good.  They  indulge  to  excess  in  the  use  of  intoxicating  liquors,  and 
have  at  times  displayed  the  character  of  perfect  savages  in  acts  cf 
ferocity  and  violence.  As  they  live  mostly  by  hunting,  the  men,  women, 
and  children  follow  the  buffalo  far  to  the  west  and  south-west.  They 
are  desirous,  notwithstanding,  of  having  missionaries  and  teachers  to 
reside  among  them,  are  willing  that  their  children  should  be  taught, 
and  will  listen  themselves  to  the  preaching  of  the  gospel. 

“ The  Omahas  number  1050,  and  are  esteemed  more  docile  and  harm- 
less than  the  adjoining  tribes.  They  have  long  been  most  anxious  to 
have  missionaries  and  teachers  among  them ; and  since  the  brethren 
have  come,  they  have  given  them  a most  cordial  welcome.  It  is  affect- 
ing to  hear  them  relate  their  efforts  to  obtain  a knowledge  of  truth. 
Their  remote  ancestors  had  cut  a pole,  which  was  to  be  held  sacred, 
and  handed  down  to  the  latest  generations : and  had  also  given  them  a 
sacred  pipe,  with  which  they  were  to  worship  on  the  death  of  a chief 

MISSIONS  AMONG  THE  INDIAN  TRIBES.  21 


or  other  important  event ; but  these,  they  say,  could  not  give  them 
any  instruction,  for  which  reason  they  thought  our  Bible  was  to  be 
greatly  preferred.  They  are  extremely  anxious  to  have  their  children 
taught.  Provision  was  liberally  made  last  year  by  a few  ladies  in 
New  York  to  support  a large  number  of  these  children  in  the  board- 
ing-school at  Iowa.  This  was,  at  first,  the  earnest  request  of  the 
chiefs  ; but  when  the  Indians  were  applied  to  for  their  children,  they 
were  afraid  and  unwilling  to  trust  them  to  go  so  far  away,  lest  the 
tribes  in  whose  bounds  the  school  is  placed  should  do  them  injury. 

“ They  have  been  forced  to  leave  then’  old  villages  above  the  Council 
Bluff  by  their  enemies,  the  Sioux,  and  are  at  present  very  much  dis- 
pirited. They  are  also  restricted  in  their  hunting-grounds  by  their 
cruel  and  powerful  neighbors.  From  these  causes  they  are  very  poor : 
both  men  and  women  are  clothed  in  skins,  and  their  children,  even  in 
winter,  are  nearly  naked,  and  often  entirely  so.  During  the  last  summer 
they  suffered  froii  an  attack  of  the  Iowas,  by  which  a number  were 
wounded,  and  also  from  a murderous  attack  of  the  Sioux,  by  which 
seventy-three  of  their  number  were  killed.  ‘ By  this  dreadful  calam- 
ity,’ writes  Mr.  McKinney,  ‘ many  of  the  Omaha  families  have  been 
entirely  destroyed ; many  husbands  and  fathers  have  lost  their  wives 
and  children,  and  the  whole  nation  now  in  this  neighborhood  is  com- 
pletely broken  down  in  spirit.  They  seem  to  think  there  is  no  hope 
for  them,  and  ask  of  their  agent  and  missionary,  in  their  most  afflicting 
circumstances  of  bereavement  and  destitution,  What  now  shall  we 
do?  Their  agent,  Major  John  Miller,  a professing  Christian,  takes  a 
most  lively  interest  in  their  affairs,  and  at  all  times  cooperates  with  the 
mission  to  do  them  good.  Every  means  in  our  power  have  been  used 
to  raise  their  spirits,  and  to  direct  their  aims  and  efforts  into  the  chan- 
nel most  likely  to  lead  to  permanent  benefit.  One  ground  of  hope  is, 
that  they  cling  with  great  confidence  to  the  white  people,  and  seem  to 
expect  a change  for  the  better,  not  so  much  by  becoming  a strong 
savage  people  as  by  adopting  the  white  man’s  mode  of  living.  When 
Big  Cane,  their  principal  chief,  was  told  that  the  ladies  of  New  York 
felt  a deep  interest  in  his  people,  and  were  desirous  of  feeding,  clothing, 
and  educating  their  orphan  children,  he  expressed  great  satisfaction, 
and  attributed  it  to  the  agency  of  the  Great  Spirit.  When  asked  how 


many  orphans  they  had,  he  replied : “We  are  all  orphans,  and  need  the 
aid  of  our  white  brethren.”  ’ 

“Like  most  of  the  other  tribes  on  the  Missouri  river,  the  Omahas 
are  strongly  addicted  to  intoxicating  liquors.  Poor  as  they  are,  they 
will  often  give  a horse  for  a few  gallons  of  whiskey ; and  their  wisest 
and  most  influential  men  are  often  engaged  in  drunken  frolics.  Their 
agent  and  the  missionaries  are  doing  every  thing  in  their  power  to 
correct  this  dreadful  evil.  They  have  told  them  that  they  can  do 
nothing  to  assist  them  unless  they  give  up  a practice  which  they  know 
to  be  wrong,  and  which  they  see  is  drawing  them  to  certain  ruin. 
This  contest  between  light  and  darkness  will  be  severe,  and  life  or 
death  to  these  poor  Indians  is  suspended  on  the  issue.  With  much  to 
discourage,  there  are  already  tokens  for  good  among  them.” — Report 
1847,  pp.  11, 12. 

“ Both  tribes  are  in  a state  of  degradation,  destitution,  and  wretch- 
edness. They  are  acquainted  only  with  hunting,  and  know  not  how 
to  labor.  When  not  on  the  chase,  the  men  are  idle,  and  given  to 
intoxication.  They  see  that  the  game  is  fast  going  beyond  their  reach, 
and  they  profess  a willingness  to  learn  the  customs  of  the  white  man. 
They  are  willing  to  be  instructed  and  to  hear  preaching,  and  anxious 
that  their  children  should  be  taken  into  the  boarding-school.  One  mis- 
sion and  one  school  is  but  half  what  is  needed.  Each  tribe  ought  to 
have  a mission.  They  do  not  live  together,  nor  is  it  best  that  they 
should  do  so.  The  Otoes  have  a small  school  annuity  of  five  hundred 
dollars,  which  for  the  present  they  have  given,  that  their  children  may 
share  in  the  benefits  of  the  school.  They  have  other  annuities  which 
would  aid  in  giving  them  a mission  and  a school  to  themselves.  The 
Omahas  have  no  annuity ; but  both  tribes  own  a rich  and  beautiful 
country,  ten  times  larger  than  their  wants  require.  Should  part  of 
their  land  be  disposed  of  to  the  Government,  as  has  been  recommend- 
ed by  the  able  and  experienced  Superintendent  of  Indian  Affairs,  both 
tribes  would  have  means  of  their  own  to  support  a system  of  education 
and  instruction  which,  under  proper  regulations,  would  greatly  aid 
them  in  adopting  the  habits  of  civilized  life.” — Report  1848,  p.  13. 

This  mission  now  consists  of  one  ordained  missionary,  six  male  and 
female  assistant  missionaries,  with  42  scholars  in  the  boarding-school. 


MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


33 


The  little  mission  among  the  Seminoles  was  the  next  established, 
having  been  formed  in  1848.  It  is  an  off-shoot  from  the  Creek  mission. 
The  Rev.  R.  M.  Loughridge,  of  this  mission,  had  visited  the  Seminoles 
in  1846,  and  was  well  received  by  them,  though  some  of  them  knew 
nothing  about  ministers  or  preaching,  and  thought  it  safest  and  best 
to  oppose  all  the  ways  of  the  white  men,  “ such  as  schools,  preaching, 
fiddle-dancing,  card-playing,  and  the  like.”  They  are  “ living  by  them- 
selves in  the  Creek  country,  their  settlements  being  about  one  hundred 
miles  south-west  from  the  station  at  Kowetah.  They  are  the  remnant 
of  a once  powerful  and  warlike  tribe.  They  consider  themselves  to 
have  been  most  deeply  injured  by  the  white  man.  They  have  no 
school  funds,  and  are  poor  and  discouraged.  What  property  they  have 
is  exchanged  for  strong  drink,  of  which  large  quantities  are  consumed 
among  them.”  Thus  was  their  condition  described  in  the  Annual  Re- 
port of  the  Board  in  1849,  and  in  1852  it  was  represented  as  but  little 
if  at  all  more  hopeful.  “ The  temporal  condition  of  this  small  tribe 
is  not  improving,  and  is  in  many  respects  discouraging.  . . . Intem- 
perance is  still  prevalent,  and  is  even  on  the  increase,  wasting  their 
means  and  destroying  their  health ; and  their  number  is  decreasing.” 

Almost  the  only  thing  that  encourages  the  hope  of  a better  state 
of  things  amongst  this  tribe,  is  the  patient  labor  of  their  missionary 
teachers.  One  of  these  is  a somewhat  remarkable  man,  himself  a Semi- 
nole Indian,  Mr.  John  D.  Bemo.  He  was  joined  in  1848  by  Mr.  John 
Lilley,  who  had  been  sent  out  in  1845,  with  a view  to  form,  in  connec- 
tion with  Mr.  Bemo,  a school  among  these  Indians,  but  had  been 
detained  among  the  Creeks  by  the  wants  of  the  station  at  Kowetah. 
The  subsequent  progress  and  present  circumstances  of  the  Seminole 
mission  are  thus  referred  to  in  the  Annual  Report  of  1853 : 

“ The  establishment  of  this  mission  was  at  first  an  experiment.  They 
had  expressed  no  wish  for  missionaries  or  schools,  and  it  was  not  known 
that  they  would  even  send  their  children  to  be  taught.  They,  however, 
received  the  teachers  kindly,  and  the  chiefs  made  no  objections  to  the 
school,  or  to  the  religious  services  conducted  at  the  mission.  As  the 
children  advanced  in  learning,  their  parents  became  more  interested, 
and  others  became  desirous  that  their  children  should  be  permitted  to 
share  in  the  benefits.  The  school  is  yet  on  a small  scale,  containing 


seventeen  Seminoles,  supported  by  the  mission,  and  four  Creeks,  sup- 
ported by  their  parents.  Three  of  the  scholars  were  destitute  orphans, 
and  could  not  well  be  refused  admission,  although  they  are  too  young 
for  a boarding-school.  The  other  fourteen  Seminoles  are  bright  and 
promising  children.  The  two  eldest,  of  each  sex,  will  soon  be  young 
men  and  young  women.  The  parents  of  the  Creek  children  esteem  it 
a privilege  to  support  their  children  under  such  good  instructions. 
When  out  of  school,  both  boys  and  girls  engage  cheerfully  in  their 
appropriate  employments.  The  best  hopes  of  this  discouraged  tribe 
rest  upon  this  mission.  Although  the  scholars  are  few  in  number, 
their  influence  and  their  example,  especially  of  the  larger  boys  and 
girls,  are  already  felt ; and  with  the  blessing  of  God,  they  will  be  pre- 
pared to  do  much  to  promote  the  best  interests  of  their  people.” 

“ If  the  funds  of  the  Board  would  permit,  the  number  of  scholars 
should  at  once  be  doubled.  The  time,  also,  has  fully  come  when  a min- 
ister of  the  gospel  should  be  sent  to  this  mission.  Besides  the  Semi- 
noles, several  settlements  of  the  Creeks  are  entirely  destitute  of  preach- 
ing, and  a large  settlement  of  Shawnees,  consisting  of  forty  families, 
is  but  twelve  miles  from  Oak  Ridge,  the  site  of  the  mission.  His 
whole  time  could  be  employed  in  preaching  the  gospel  to  these  desti- 
tute neighborhoods.” 

The  missionary  force  at  Oak  Ridge  now  consists  of  four  male  and 
female  assistant  missionaries,  with  twenty-six  scholars  in  the  board- 
ing-school. 

The  Chickasaw  mission  is  the  latest  that  has  been  planted  among 
the  Indian  tribes  by  the  Board.  It  was  resolved  upon  in  1849,  but 
the  work  of  preaching  and  instruction  in  schools  was  not  begun  until 
1852.  These  Indians  have  purchased  a part  of  the  country  belonging 
to  the  Choctaws,  amongst  whom  some  of  them  are  still  living,  but  many 
of  them  are  settled  in  their  own  district.  Their  number  is  stated  at 
over  5000  souls.  They  receive  large  annuities  from  the  Government, 
and  are  a spirited  and  interesting  people,  though  less  under  the  influence 
of  the  Christian  religion  than  their  Choctaw  neighbors.  living  near- 
est the  south-western  extremity  of  the  Indian  Territory,  they  would 
enjoy  advantages,  if  themselves  evangelized,  for  extending  the  blessings 
of  the  gospel  to  the  tribes  farther  west  and  south. 


MISSIONS  AMONG  THE  INDIAN  TRIBES- 


Two  stations  are  now  formed  among  this  people — one  at  Wapanuckai 
the  other  at  Boggy  Depot.  At  the  former  place  a large  and  conve- 
niently arranged  building,  of  stone,  has  been  erected,  in  which  one 
hundred  scholars  can  be  accommodated.  The  funds  of  this  building 
were  supplied  by  the  Indian  Council,  who  have  also  engaged  to  con- 
tribute the  usual  part  of  the  current  expenses  of  the  school.  In  this 
building  the  Chickasaws  have  taken  a generous  pride.  It  was  begun 
in  the  midst  of  the  forest,  far  distant  from  mills,  lumber-yards,  mechan- 
ics, or  any  of  the  requisites  for  such  a building,  and  required  not  only 
patience  but  unwearied  energy  and  industry  for  its  completion — all  of 
which  were  happily  found  in  Mr.  James  S.  Allan  and  his  wife,  who 
had  the  privilege  of  being  the  first  missionaries  of  our  Church  to  this 
important  tribe.  The  school  was  opened  in  October,  1852,  under  the 
charge  of  the  Rev.  H.  Balentine,  and  during  the  first  term  nearly  sixty 
girls  were  enjoying,  as  boarding-scholars,  the  precious  advantages  of 
a Christian  education.  The  full  number  of  girls  are  now  in  the  school. 
Thus  a fountain  of  Christian  influence  is  springing  up  in  the  wilder- 
ness. Many  households  will  have  reason  to  bless  God  for  this  place  of 
Christian  training,  and  its  daily  lessons  will  prepare  many  to  become 
citizens  of  heaven. 

The  Council,  in  1851,  passed  a law  requesting  the  Board  to  take 
charge  of  a boarding-school  for  boys,  to  contain  the  same  number  of 
scholars.  To  this  proposal,  consent  was  given  upon  certain  conditions ; 
but  the  Council  have  not  taken  further  action  in  the  premises.  This 
important  measure  remains  therefore  in  abeyance,  though  we  may  hope 
it  will  yet  be  carried  into  practical  operation. 

The  second  station,  ten  miles  distant  from  Wapanucka,  was  under  the 
chai’ge  of  an  ordained  missionary,  now  absent  for  his  health.  He  had 
several  stations  for  preaching,  and  had  already  met  with  good  encourage- 
ment in  this  work.  Three  native  members  were  added  to  the  church 
at  the  first  communion.  A small  brick  church  has  been  erected  at 
the  Depot.  The  education  of  the  children  was  not  neglected ; over 
twenty,  most  of  them  in  a day-school,  were  under  the  instruction  of 
the  ladies  of  the  station.  The  health  of  the  missionaries  having  given 
way,  Boggy  Depot  is  at  present  unoccupied. 

The  Report  of  this  year,  1854,  gives  as  the  statistics  of  this  mis- 


23 


sion — -two  stations,  two  ordained  missionaries,  thirteen  male  and  female 
assistant  missionaries. 

The  complete  returns  of  these  Indian  missions,  as  stated  in  the 
Report  of  1854,  are  : eight  ministers  of  the  gospel ; fifty-eight  male 
and  female  assistant  missionaries,  of  whom  four  are  natives, — teachers, 
farmers,  the  wives  of  missionaries,  &c. ; ninety-six  communicants  ; and 
five  hundred  and  thirty-eight  scholars,  mostly  in  boarding-schools. 

For  the  support  of  these  missions,  the  sum  of  $43,457  was  expended 
in  the  year  ending  May  1, 1853,  a part  of  which  was  on  account  of 
the  buildings  for  the  Chickasaw  and  Ottawa  boarding-schools.  The 
sum  of  $23,240  was  received  from  the  Government,  in  aid  of  the 
schools,  being  mostly  moneys  appropriated  to  this  object  by  the  Indians, 
out  of  their  annuities.  This  leaves  a little  more  than  $20,000  as  the 
amount  furnished  by  the  Presbyterian  Church  to  the  cause  of  mis- 
sions among  the  Indians — a very  small  sum  for  an  object  so  good  and 
noble. 

The  foregoing  narrative  shows  that  the  boarding-school  system  has 
been  largely  adopted  in  these  missions.  It  is  a system  that  has  some 
drawbacks,  and  yet  greater  advantages.  It  involves  a considerable 
expenditure  of  money — for  buildings,  the  support  of  teachers,  food 
and  clothing  of  scholars.  This  consideration  will  always  prevent  the 
establishment  of  such  schools  in  all  tribes  alike.  Some  of  the  tribes 
are  very  poor ; others  are  not  willing  to  appropriate  their  annuities  for 
this  or  any  other  good  object.  No  part  of  the  missionary  work, 
moreover,  requires  so  large  an  amount  of  care  and  labor,  on  the  part 
both  of  the  missionaries  and  of  the  executive  officers  of  the  Board, 
in  providing  supplies  of  every  kind  for  large  families,  living  far  in  the 
interior  of  the  western  wilderness.  It  is  no  light  matter  to  furnish  all 
the  different  kinds  of  food,  clothing,  and  domestic  service  required  by  a 
household  of  one  hundred  and  fifty  inmates,  at  a place  far  distant  from 
markets,  stores,  and  the  usual  conveniences  of  civilized  life.  Nor  is  it 
a small  thing  to  keep  all  the  accounts  of  such  purchases,  with  a 
voucher  for  every  item,  however  minute.  Yet  with  all  this  complex 
and  difficult  labor,  and  with  the  more  serious  discouragements  of  the 


MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


24 


impaired  health  of  many  engaged  in  the  work,  and  of  too  frequent 
changes  of  scholars  and  teachers,  the  system  of  boarding-school  in- 
struction is  nevertheless  attended  with  the  greatest  benefit  to  the  In- 
dians— making  it  well  worthy  of  adoption,  as  a part  of  missionary 
agency.  While  it  need  not  be  used  to  the  exclusion  of  other  kinds  of 
work, — for  the  ordained  missionaries  all  preach  the  gospel,  and  day- 
schools  are  sustained  wherever  scholars  will,  attend  them, — it  may  at 
the  same  time  be  pursued  as  being  in  the  end  one  of  the  best  means 
of  doing  good  to  the  Indians.  The  scholars  in  these  institutions  are 
trained  up  under  Christian  influence,  instruction,  and  example.  They 
live  in  the  missionary  household,  and  are  clothed,  plainly  but  comfort- 
ably, after  our  fashion.  The  boys  are  taught  to  work  in  the  garden 
and  on  the  farm ; the  girls  to  knit,  sew,  and  attend  to  the  common 
duties  of  housekeeping.  They  are  taught  the  English  language,  and 
the  usual  branches  of  common-school  learning.  They  are  assembled 
morning  and  evening  at  family  worship,  and  on  the  Sabbath  they  unite 
together  in  the  services  of  the  sanctuary.  Thus  they  are  in  training 
for  the  duties  of  life  under  the  happiest  circumstances.  Many  of  them 
have  already  become  the  subjects  of  divine  grace.  A few  are  already 
looking  to  the  work  of  the  Christian  ministry ; some  are  already,  and 
others  probably  will  be  teachers ; others  still  will  occupy  posts  of 
influence  in  their  respective  tribes,  as  magistrates  or  council-men.  The 
boys  will  grow  up  to  revere  the  laws  and  institutions  of  civilized 
society ; the  girls,  to  exert  a hallowed  influence  in  the  domestic  circle 
as  Christian  daughters,  wives  and  mothers.  In  all  this,  we  see  princi- 
ples or  elements  of  civilization  of  a high  order, — the  beginnings  of  a 
Christian  life  in  the  wilderness, — the  desert  blossoming  as  the  rose. 

The  happy  influence  of  these  missions  on  the  Indians  may  be  shown 
by  an  example.  Fifteen  years  ago,  the  Rev.  Peter  Dougherty,  on 
leaving  the  Seminary  at  Princeton,  went  among  the  Chippewa  and 
Ottawa  Indians  in  the  neighborhood  of  Grand  Traverse  Bay,  on  Lake 
Michigan.  He  found  them  living  in  a sad  condition,  dwelling  in  small 
bark  huts  or  wigwams,  poorly  clad,  and  deriving  a precarious  subsist- 
ence from  fishing,  making  sugar  from  the  maple  tree,  and  the  cultiva- 
tion of  little  fields  of  Indian  corn  by  the  women.  They  were  exposed, 
moreover,  to  the  pernicious  arts  of  the  whiskey-trader,  who  reaped  the 


greater  part  of  their  small  annuities.  They  were  thus  fast  travelling 
on  the  road  to  extinction. 

Mr.  Dougherty  mingled  freely  with  this  poor  people,  and  gained 
their  confidence  and  good-will.  He  built  a small  log  cabin  for  him- 
self, and  another  for  a school-house,  doing  most  of  the  work  with  his 
own  hands.  He  then  taught  the  children  during  the  week,  and  preached 
to  as  many  as  could  be  collected  on  the  Sabbath.  After  some 
months  he  returned  to  his  friends  on  a short  visit,  and  was  accompanied 
back  by  his  wife,  who  did  not  hesitate,  at  the  call  of  duty,  to  exchange 
the  comforts  of  refined  Christian  society  for  a home  among  the  chil- 
dren of  the  forest.  Gradually  an  impression  was  made  on  the  minds 
of  the  Indians.  One  family  after  another  was  induced  to  build  small 
cabins  of  rough  logs,  near  the  dwelling  of  their  missionary ; little 
fields  were  opened  and  fenced ; fruit  trees  were  planted,  and  vegeta- 
bles raised  in  the  gardens.  A suitable  church  building  was  erected, 
with  a sweet-toned  bell  to  call  the  worshippers  to  the  house  of  God. 
The  unwonted  sight  of  a Christian  village  appeared  on  the  shores  of 
the  bay. 

The  means  of  grace  administered  in  this  humble  village  were  fol- 
lowed by  the  influences  of  the  Holy  Spirit ; hopeful  conversions 
amongst  his  Indian  congregation  cheered  the  heart  of  the  missionary. 
A church  was  organized  in  1843,  and  to  its  communion,  at  different 
times,  over  thirty  of  the  Indians  have  been  admitted  after  receiving 
Christian  baptism.  Some  of  these  have  finished  their  earthly  course, 
in  the  enjoyment  of  a good  hope  through  grace,  and  they  are  now  at 
rest  with  Jesus.  Surely  no  doubt  can  be  entertained  as  to  the  benign 
influence  of  this  work  of  faith  and  labor  of  love.  Its  fruits  are  beau- 
tiful here,  and  in  the  w-orld  of  glory  they  will  be  for  ever  perfect. 

The  Christianization  of  these  Indians  was  followed  by  their  civiliza- 
tion. Of  this  a marked  proof  is  now  to  be  mentioned.  The  land 
occupied  by  the  settlement  on  Grand  Traverse  Bay  had  been  ceded  by 
the  Indians  in  former  years  to  the  Government,  and,  being  a reserva- 
tion, it  was  not  yet  in  market.  Mr.  Dougherty’s  Indians,  as  they  may 
be  called,  in  distinction  from  the  .unevangelized  part  of  the  same  bands, 
were  now  anxious  to  obtain  land  for  permanent  possession  and  improve- 
ment, so  that  they  might  have  a settled  dwelling-place,  and  leave  the 


MISSIONS  AMONG  T 


fruits  of  their  labor  to  their  children.  They  were  the  more  encouraged 
to  desire  this,  by  the  wise  and  liberal  legislation  of  the  State  of  Michi- 
gan, already  referred  to,  giving  to  the  Indians  the  rights  of  citizenship. 
After  long  consideration  by  the  Indians  and  their  missionary,  and  no 
small  degree  of  attention  on  the  part  of  the  Executive  Committee  of 
the  Board,  including  repeated  references  to  the  Indian  Department  at 
Washington,  it  was  eventually  deemed  best  that  they  should  remove 
from  their  first  settlement,  purchase  small  tracts  of  land  on  the  other 
side  of  the  bay,  and  thus  begin  life  anew.  They  had  carefully  hus- 
banded their  small  annuities  and  earnings,  and  some  of  them  were  able, 
in  1852,  to  purchase  little  tracts  of  forty,  sixty,  or  eighty  acres  each, 
to  which  they  have  now  removed,  and  they  are  hard  at  work  clearing 
their  lands,  and  putting  up  their  houses.  They  have  received  a partial 
compensation  for  their  “ improvements”  at  their  first  settlement ; and 
they  should  receive  further  payments  from  the  Government  in  exchange 
for  lands  west  of  the  Mississippi,  the  expenses  of  their  removal,  and 
their  support  for  a year,  all  of  which  were  included  in  their  treaty 
with  the  Government.  As  these  provisions  of  the  treaty  will  not  now 
be  called  into  requisition,  in  consequence  of  the  Indians  remaining  on 
lands  purchased  in  Michigan,  they  have  an  equitable  claim  on  the 
G-overnment  for  the  funds  which  would  have  otherwise  been  expended 
under  the  stipulations  of  the  treaty.  The  possession  of  these  would 
at  once  enable  them  to  purchase  lands.  The  Executive  Committee 
have  had  their  claims  strongly  presented  to  the  authorities  at  Wash- 
ington, who  are  disposed  to  do  every  thing  in  their  power  to  promote 
the  welfare  of  the  Indians. 

The  fact  that  their  removal  from  the  first  settlement  was  made  in 
full  view  of  losing  all  their  former  labor,  is  a decided  proof  of  their 
sense  of  the  value  of  a settled  home,  and  their  willingness  by  patient 
and  laborious  industry  to  support  themselves  and  their  families.  It  is 
gratifying  to  add,  that  they  were  most  anxious  to  have  their  benefactor 
accompany  them  to  their  new  abode.  A memorial  was  sent  by  them 
to  the  Committee,  signed  by  a large  number,  requesting  that  Mr. 
Dougherty  might  be  transferred  to  their  new  settlement.  He  is  now 


HEINDI  AN  TRIBES.  25 


there,  pursuing  his  work  under  new  and  more  hopeful  circumstances. 
It  has  become  expedient  to  form  a small  boarding-school,  as  the  fami- 
lies are  now  at  considerable  distances  apart ; and  two  more  stations 
have  been  occupied  on  Little  Traverse  Bay,  where  interesting  day- 
schools  are  supported. 

This  narrative  exemplifies  the  working  of  our  Indian  missions,  and 
shows  clearly  the  result  to  which  they  directly  tend.  Their  aim  is  to 
save  the  Indians  for  this  life  and  the  life  to  come.  They  promote  their 
civilization,  and  thus  fit  them  to  become  eventually  incorporated  with 
the  other  inhabitants  of  this  country, — who  can  have  a better  right  to 
be  enrolled  as  native  citizens  under  our  government  ? And  they  point 
their  minds  to  that  life  and  immortality  which  the  gospel  alone  brings 
to  light.  What  has  been  accomplished  amongst  these  bands  of  Chip- 
pewas  and  Ottawas,  is  precisely  what  we  hope  to  see  accomplished 
among  all  the  Indian  tribes. 

There  are  difficulties  in  the  way  of  all  this — difficulties  numerous 
and  most  serious.  But  with  the  blessing  of  God,  this  great  work  can 
be  performed,  at  least  for  many  of  the  tribes ; and  most  weighty 
reasons  are  addressed  to  the  Christians  of  this  land,  to  induce  a vigor- 
ous prosecution  of  these  missions.  The  Indians  have  strong  and  pecu- 
liar claims  upon  us.  They  are  our  nearest  unevangelized  neighbors ; 
they  live  almost  within  hearing  of  our  church  bells.  They  are  depend- 
ent on  us  almost  alone  for  the  means  of  grace.  And  their  past  history 
has  been  sadly  interwoven  with  our  own.  They  once  owned  the  fair 
lands  from  which  we  now  draw  so  large  a part  of  our  comfort  and 
wealth ; and  in  exchange  for  these  broad  acres,  they  have  received,  as 
our  largest  gift,  the  accursed  “ fire-water.”  Gradually  have  they  re- 
treated before  the  advance  of  our  population,  diminished  in  numbers 
by  contact  with  unprincipled  white  men,  far  more  than  by  their  wars 
with  our  race.  They  are  now  in  their  last  retreats,  few,  feeble,  dis- 
pirited, soon  to  pass  away  and  be  no  more,  except  on  one  condition. 
That  condition  is  their  reception  of  the  gospel.  This  only  can  civilize 
them.  This  only  can  save  them  from  extinction  as  a people.  And 
this  can  save  them  for  ever. 


III. 

MISSIONS  IN  WESTERN  AFRICA. 

“Hthfopla  sjjall  soon  stretc!)  out  ter  jmnbs  unto  CKoa.” 


Africa  is  one  of  the  principal  missionary  fields  of  the  Church.  It 
is  one  of  the  darkest  parts  of  the  world.  Its  large  population  is 
among  the  most  ignorant  and  debased  of  the  human  family ; and  yet 
among  the  most  susceptible  of  improvement.  It  is  a land  easily  reached 
from  Christian  countries,  lying  adjacent  to  Europe,  and  separated  from 
our  States  only  by  the  Atlantic.  For  long  periods  of  time,  its  chief 
visitors  were  those  whose  business  was  the  infamous  slave-trade ; but 
the  true  light  is  now  dawning  on  this  benighted  land,  and  its  prospects 
were  never  before  so  full  of  hope. 

On  the  north,  Africa  is  inhabited  mainly  by  Mohammedans,  in  the 
Barbary  States  and  Egypt ; but  European  influences  are  more  and 
more  shaping  the  direction  of  public  affairs  in  those  countries.  Algiers 
is  now  subject  to  France,  while  Egypt  is  virtually  a British  high- 
way to  India  and  the  East.  A few  Protestant  missionaries  are 
stationed  in  Egypt  and  Algiers. 

The  whole  eastern  coast  to  the  southern  tropic  presents  but  a single 
point  of  missionary  labor — the  station  at  Mombas,  a few  degrees  south 
of  the  equator.  Some  German  missionaries,  connected  with  an  Eng- 
lish Episcopal  Society,  are  endeavoring  to  penetrate  from  this  place 
into  the  interior. 

The  southern  part  of  Africa  differs  widely  from  all  the  rest  of  the 
continent ; being  a British  colony,  having  a sparse  population,  and 
being  supplied  with  relatively  a large  number  of  missionaries.  Ten 


European  Societies  and  one  American  support  about  one  hundred  and 
forty  missionaries  among  the  native  tribes  in  the  colony  and  beyond 
its  limits,  with  a large  staff  of  teachers  and  other  assistants,  and  the 
reports  of  last  year  enumerated  over  12,000  communicants  in  the 
churches.  The  transformation  of  character,  habits  and  pursuits  which 
has  been  wrought  among  some  of  these  tribes,  and  particularly  among 
the  Hottentots,  is  truly  wonderful,  and  such  as  could  have  been  effected 
only  by  divine  power. 

From  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  northward,  through  the  whole  of 
Central  Africa,  the  Christian’s  eye  rests  on  no  bright  place.  Abyssinia, 
towards  the  north-east,  is  inhabited  by  nominal  Christians,  but  amongst 
them  ignorance,  superstition,  and  other  marks  of  an  unevangelized 
people  are  everywhere  visible ; while  the  rest  of  the  interior  is  the 
abode  of  Mohammedans  and  pagans,  numbered  by  many  millions, 
amongst  whom  sin  abounds  and  death  reigns. 

The  western  coast  of  Africa  has  been  reserved  to  the  last  place  in  this 
brief  survey.  The  coast  itself,  for  some  sixteen  degrees  of  latitude  on 
each  side  of  the  equator,  and  the  densely-inhabited  regions  in  the  interior 
to  which  access  can  most  easily  be  gained  from  this  part  of  the  coast, 
form  a distinct  missionary  field.  It  is  in  these  regions  that  the  mass 
of  the  African  people  live.  It  is  here  that  Satan’s  seat  is  in  Africa. 
Here  the  door  for  missionary  labors  now  stands  wide  open ; and  here 
the  gospel  is  beginning  to  win  some  of  its  brightest  triumphs. 

or, 


- 

50 

1 ii  Vi, 

Cj 

/VT 

VS 

k 

\ 

Si 

v . 

•ithogr? 


MISSIONS  IN  WESTERN  AFRICA. 


The  greater  part  of  the  population  of  Africa  is  found  within  the 
tropics.  At  the  north  and  the  south,  dry  and  thirsty  tracts  of  country 
abound ; the  rivers  are  few  in  number ; rain  seldom  falls  ; a large  pop- 
ulation could  not  find  the  means  of  subsistence.  But  a different  scene 
appears  as  you  approach  the  equator,  especially  along  the  western 
coast.  The  Congo  and  the  Senegal  are  rivers  of  respectable  size, 
while  the  Niger  is  a river  worthy  of  a great  continent.  The  soil  of 
the  country  is  extremely  rich.  All  kinds  of  ti  opical  vegetation  have  a 
luxurious  growth.  And  a larger  population  exists  in  these  regions 
than  is  found  in  the  whole  of  North  America,  notwithstanding  the 
drawbacks  on  the  growth  of  population  among  the  Negro  races  in 
Africa,  occasioned  by  the  long-continued  traffic  in  their  own  sons  and 
daughters.  The  Foulahs,  the  Mandingoes,  and  the  various  Negro 
tribes  inhabiting  the  country  from  the  Senegal  southward,  comprise 
many  millions  of  souls.  The  kingdoms  of  Ashantee,  Dahomey,  and 
Benin,  each  contain  severally  a large  population. 

In  forming  an  estimate  of  the  spiritual  condition  of  these  multitudes, 
we  must  distinguish  between  the  Mohammedans  and  the  pagans,  though 
they  are  equally  in  need  of  salvation  by  faith  in  Jesus  Christ.  It  is 
remarkable  that  the  Mohammedan  religion  has  become  widely  spread 
in  Africa,  and  also,  that  it  is  still  extending  its  conquests,  while  in  Asia 
it  is  at  a stand,  if  not  on  the  decline.  The  Foulahs  are  Mohammedans, 
and  the  Mandingoes.  Many  of  the  Negroes  have  also  embraced  the 
religion  of  the  False  Prophet.  This  may  be  owing  to  their  desire  of 
education.  Most  of  the  teachers  of  what  little  education  is  within 
their  reach  are  Mohammedans,  and  thus  the  impress  of  this  false  reli- 
gion becomes  early  stamped  on  the  minds  of  many  of  the  youth.  It 
has  not  been  by  the  Sword  but  by  the  Alphabet  that  Mohammedanism 
has  spread  in  equatorial  Africa — literally  by  the  Alphabet,  for  the 
education  imparted  seldom  goes  further  than  the  mere  rudiments.  But 
whatever  the  education  or  the  belief  of  these  Mohammedan  Africans, 
their  morals  and  practice  are  little  better  than  those  of  the  heathen. 

Paganism  in  Africa  appears  urder  a peculiarly  low  and  debasing 
form.  It  has  no  order  of  Brahmans,  no  lofty  temples,  no  sacred  books. 
It  is  called  Fetichism  or  Greegreeism,  which  may  be  defined  perhaps  as 
the  religion  of  charms.  Its  principal  idea  is  that  of  protection  from 


27 


evil  by  wearing  a fetich,  or  greegree,  to  charm  away  the  danger,  what- 
ever it  may  be.  Any  thing  may  be  a fetich — a shell,  the  hoof  of  a 
kid,  a piece  of  leather,  an  ugly  carved  block  of  wood,  &c.  These  are 
worn  on  the  arm,  or  on  the  dress,  and  are  fastened  in  their  huts,  to 
guard  from  sickness,  death,  the  arts  of  enemies,  and  other  evils,  and  to 
insure  success  in  fishing  or  in  traffic. 

Amongst  the  Negro  nations,  it  is  common  for  men  to  array  them- 
selves in  hideous  costume,  and  pass  themselves  off  as  devil-men,  having 
the  power  of  witchcraft.  The  power  of  these  men  is  greatly  dreaded 
by  the  ignorant  people,  and  no  efforts  are  spared  to  gratify  them  and 
secure  their  friendship.  Presents  are  made  to  them  for  this  purpose. 
It  is  easy  to  see  that  wicked  men  can  use  this  pretended  power  to  sub- 
serve their  own  malicious  and  base  passions.  Even  murder  is  often 
committed  at  their  instigation.  Another  form  of  African  superstition, 
which  frequently  leads  to  the  destruction  of  human  life,  is  the  ordeal 
of  drinking  Sassi  wood  water.  This  is  required  of  one  charged  with 
some  offence,  as  a means  of  proving  his  innocence.  The  water  is  either 
rejected  by  the  stomach,  or  else  it  proves  a deadly  poison.  Many 
instances  of  murder  by  this  means  have  been  reported  by  missionaries 
and  other  writers.  But  probably  the  worst  effects  of  African  heathen- 
ism are  witnessed  on  the  death  of  a king  or  chief.  It  is  then  a com- 
mon practice  to  put  men  to  death,  in  order  that  they  may  accompany 
their  departed  lord  into  the  world  of  spirits, — the  number  who  are 
thus  killed  depending  on  the  rank  or  power  of  their  master.  These 
are  some  of  the  dreadful  evils  which  prevail  amongst  the  heathen 
nations  of  Western  Africa.  The  more  common  vices  of  heathen  life 
must  also  be  enumerated, — the  prevalence  of  falsehood  and  deception ; 
the  utter  want  of  pure  morals,  and  the  common  practice  of  polygamy* 


* Polygamy  abounds : a man’s  wealth  is  estimated  often  by  the  number  of  his  wivesi 
and  these  are  treated  as  if  they  were  slaves.  They  are  bought  for  a price.  Mr.  Mackey 
has  given  as  a curiosity,  though  it  awakens  sad  reflections,  “the  articles  paid  for  a Coris- 
co  girl.  When  a Coriseo  man  marries  a girl  on  the  mainland,  the  amount  paid  is  not 
so  great,  as  the  same  articles  are  valued  much  higher.  The  list  is  as  follows:  20  small 
bars  of  iron,  1 gun,  1 neptune,  1 brass  kettle,  1 coat,  1 shirt,  1 chair,  1 hat,  2 caps,  1 cut- 
lass, 4 knives,  1 umbrella,  1 chest,  4 wash  basins,  6 plates,  4 empty  bottles,  1 keg  of  pow- 
der, 1 iron  pot,  1 brass  pan,  10  brass  rods,  10  pieces  of  cloth,  5 mugs,  1 small  looking- 
glass,  1 jug,  4 pins,  5 needles,  5 fish  hooks,  2 razors,  2 pair  of  scissors,  8 bunches  of  small 


28  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


with  the  degraded  condition  of  the  female  sex ; and  all  the  cruelty, 
oppression,  and  loss  of  life  which  follow  in  the  train  of  the  horrible 
traffic  in  slaves,  so  long  characteristic  of  this  part  of  the  world.  The 
marauding  excursions,  the  midnight  attacks  on  sleeping  villages,  the 
burning  houses,  the  screams  of  terror  from  helpless  women  and  chil- 
dren, the  murder  of  aged  and  feeble  persons,  the  breaking  up  of  families, 
the  savage  treatment  of  captives,  the  hurrying  and  cruel  march  to  the 
sea-coast,  the  heartless  sale  to  heartless  foreigners,  the  horrors  of  the 
“ middle  passage,” — these  are  scenes  better  worthy  of  hell  than  of 
earth,  and  the  actors  in  them  should  be  only  the  devils  themselves. 
Yet,  alas  for  human  nature  in  its  fallen  state ! these  are  the  doings  of 
our  fellow-men,  who  have  the  same  passions  with  ourselves.  Grace  has 
made  us  to  differ  from  them.  The  gospel  has  saved  us  and  our  chil- 
dren from  scenes  of  equal  if  not  similar  violence  and  oppression.  And 
the  same  gospel  and  grace  shall  be  the  means  of  redeeming  long- 
oppressed,  miserable  Africa. 

A better  day  is  now  dawning  on  this  dark  land.  Varied  and  power- 
ful agencies  are  already  at  work  to  restrain  existing  evils,  and  to  set 
up  the  kingdom  of  righteousness  and  peace.  Amongst  these  we  must 
reckon  as  greatly  important  the  armed  squadron,  nobly  maintained  for 
a long  time  single  handed  by  the  British  government,  for  the  suppres- 
sion of  the  slave-trade.  In  later  years  the  Americau  and  the  French 
governments  have  each  maintained  a small  naval  force  on  the  African 
coast  for  the  same  object.  As  the  slave-vessels  carried  arms  and  were 
commonly  of  a piratical  character,  and  as  the  traffic  in  which  they  were 
employed  was  one  that  could  not  flourish  side  by  side  with  legitimate 
commerce,  civilization,  or  religion,  a naval  force  for  their  banishment 
became  a vital  measure.  Without  it,  colonial  settlements,  factorie 
for  trade  in  ivory  and  palm  oil,  and  missionary  stations  with  their 
schools  and  churches,  were  all  alike  impracticable.  The  slave-traders 
would  soon  have  swept  all  these  from  the  African  coast.  The  question 
concerning  the  employment  of  the  squadron  should  be  considered  one 

beads,  2 pair  of  ear-rings,  1 pocket  knife,  3 padlocks  and  keys,  4 pipes,  10  heads  of  to- 
bacco, 1 piece  of  cloth  for  her  mother,  1 silk  handerchief,  1 small  bell,  1 tumbler.  This 
list  of  articles  is  not  often  departed  from  in  these  transactions,  though  occasionally  the 
number  of  a certain  article  is  made  greater  or  less.’’ 


settled  by  experience.  Yet  an  attempt  was  made  a few  years  ago  in 
Parliament  to  have  the  British  squadron  withdrawn.  The  pecuniary 
interests  of  a certain  class  would  be  promoted  by  the  removal  of  law- 
ful restraints  upon  their  intercourse  with  the  natives.  In  our  own 
country  disparaging  remarks  have  been  made  about  the  efficiency  and 
the  expense  of  this  method  of  repressing  the  slave-trade,  as  compared 
with  other  agencies  for  the  same  purpose.  But  this  naval  force  has 
been  and  still  is  essential  to  the  success  of  every  other  means ; no 
single  measure  has  been  of  greater  benefit  to  all  that  is  good  in  the 
temporal  condition  of  the  Africans. 

Other  important  means  are  not  wanting.  The  British  and  Ameri- 
can settlements  of  Sierra  Leone  and  Liberia  are  objects  of  great 
interest  to  all  who  have  at  heart  the  welfare  of  the  African  race.  The 
colony  at  Sierra  Leone  was  formed  in  1787  for  purposes  of  trade  with 
the  Africans,  and  its  first  settlers  were  a few  hundreds  of  colored'  peo- 
ple from  America,  most  of  whom  were  refugees  who  had  left  the 
United  States  at  the  end  of  the  Revolutionary  War.  The  chief  in- 
crease, however,  in  the  population  of  the  colony  grew  out  of  the 
measures  adopted  by  the  British  Government  for  suppressing  the 
slave-trade.  It  became  necessary  to  provide  a home  for  the  recaptured 
slaves.  It  was  impossible  to  restore  them  to  their  former  abodes. 
The  native  villages  of  many  were  far  distant  in  the  interior ; the  homes 
of  others  had  been  destroyed,  and  their  friends  dispersed.  Others  still, 
in  large  numbers,  were  children  not  able  to  tell  where  their"  former 
homes  could  be  found ; and  in  many  instances  their  parents  and  friends 
had  been  killed,  or  reduced  to  slavery,  so  that  they  were  left  as  orphans. 
These  poor  people,  when  rescued  from  the  grasp  of  slave-dealers,  were 
settled  at  Sierra  Leone,  under  the  protection  and  laws  of  the  British 
Government.  Here  their  numbers  gradually  increased,  until  now  the 
population  of  the  colony  is  estimated  at  about  70,000.  They  have 
here  enjoyed  the  advantages  of  education  and  the  means  of  grace. 
Thousands  of  them  have  become  worthy  members  of  the  Church  of 
Christ,  and  they  have  acquired  the  ideas  and  the  arts  of  civilized  life. 
Freetown,  the  capital  of  the  colony,  is  far  in  advance  of  any  other 
town  on  the  western  coast,  as  the  abode  of  intelligence,  comfort,  and 
! gospel  privileges. 


MISSIONS  IN  WESTERN  AFRICA. 


One  remarkable  result  of  this  settlement  was  not  probably  antici- 
pated by  its  earliest  friends,— that  of  its  being  a kind  of  normal  or 
training-school  for  many  African  tribes.  The  liberated  slaves  were 
natives  of  different  regions.  They  had  their  distinctive  customs,  and 
various  languages  were  spoken  amongst  them.  When  brought  under 
Christian  influence,  it  was  soon  found  to  be  more  difficult  to  rescue 
them  from  their  pagan  superstitions  than  from  slavery ; but  when  made 
partakers  of  the  grace  of  God,  they  could  not  but  desire  to  see  the 
blessings  of  the  gospel  extended  to  their  own  people.  Some  of  them 
have  already  become  useful  in  this  good  work,  others  will  follow  their 
example,  and  the  light  of  this  African  Christian  settlement  will  pene- 
trate far  into  the  interior  of  the  country. 

Besides  Sierra  Leone,  the  British  Government  possesses  trading  set- 
tlements, under  the  protection  of  the  squadron  and  a small  force  of 
troops,  at  several  other  places  on  the  coast.  Of  these,  the  settlements 
on  the  Gambia,  and  at  Cape  Coast  and  Accra  on  the  Gold  Coast,  are 
the  most  important.  The  missionary  labors  carried  on  at  these  smaller 
places  have  been  attended  with  marked  success. 

The  Liberia  settlements  differ  from  Sierra  Leone  in  their  origin  and 
object,  though  their  influence  on  Africa  itself,  we  may  hope,  will 
eventually  prove  not  less  beneficial.  The  Liberians,  properly  so  called, 
not  being  natives  of  Africa,  cannot  at  first  speak  the  languages  of  the 
native  tribes.  When  they  reach  the  land  of  their  forefathers,  they  are 
vastly  superior  to  the  recaptured  slaves  in  character  and  intelligence ; 
but  though  of  the  same  race,  they  are  nevertheless  foreigners,  who 
have  been  brought  up  in  a much  colder  climate,  and  they  must  there- 
fore pass  the  ordeal  of  acclimation,  and  begin  life  anew.  Serious  risks 
attend  this  great  change  in  their  condition,  one  of  which  grows  out  of 
their  new  political  relations.  They  have  adopted  the  republican  form 
of  government,  which  more  than  all  others  requires  its  citizens  to  pos- 
sess intelligence  and  integrity.  From  their  former  position,  and  by 
reason  also  of  the  frontier  kind  of  life  in  which,  as  colonists  with 
limited  means,  they  are  now  placed,  it  would  be  unreasonable  to  expect 
that  many  of  them  should  be  capable  at  once  of  self-government.  We 
are  not,  therefore,  surprised  to  see  the  same  man  in  office  as  Governor 
and  President  for  many  years  in  succession ; it  must  be  difficult  to  find 


29 


men  qualified  to  be  the  chief  magistrate  of  the  republic,  and  to  fill  the 
inferior  but  important  stations  of  legislators  and  judges.  All  this 
shows  the  essential  importance  of  Christian  schools  in  Liberia,  while 
the  narrow  means  of  most  of  the  settlers  renders  it  necessary  for  the 
present  that  these  schools,  and  also  the  support  of  the  Christian  minis- 
try, should  be  largely  indebted  to  the  missionary  institutions  of  the 
United  States.  With  a cordial  and  vigorous  support  from  the  Ameri- 
can churches,  we  trust  that  Liberia  will  not  disappoint  the  expectations 
of  its  benevolent  founders,  and  will  become  the  favored  home  of  thou- 
sands of  our  colored  people.  Their  example  and  influence,  if  regulated 
by  the  spirit  of  the  gospel,  will  make  their  adopted  country  a great 
blessing  in  many  ways  to  the  people  of  Africa  and  to  the  negro  race. 
We  look  to  both  these  Christian  settlements,  Sierra  Leone  and  Liberia, 
with  the  deepest  interest,  as  well  adapted  to  repress  the  slave-trade 
and  other  evils,  to  foster  legitimate  commerce,  and  to  furnish  stations 
for  missionary  labor  among  the  natives  of  the  country ; and  our  hopes 
are  the  more  confident,  because  they  are  objects  of  special  interest  to 
the  two  great  Protestant  nations  of  our  age.  It  must  be  for  gracious 
purposes  that  God  has  planted  these  Christian  settlements  on  the  bor- 
ders of  this  dark  continent,  and  enlisted  for  their  prosperity  the  sympa- 
thies and  prayers  of  so  many  of  his  people  in  Great  Britain  and  our 
own  country. 

The  armed  squadrons  and  the  colonial  settlements  have  been  enume- 
rated as  powerful  agencies  for  the  benefit  of  Western  Africa.  Hardly 
inferior  to  these  is  the  commerce  now  springing  up  between  foreign 
traders  and  the  natives  along  this  coast.  The  chiefs  and  other  men  of 
influence  are  beginning  to  find  that  the  labor  of  their  dependants  will 
procure  for  them  a better  supply  of  goods  than  could  be  obtained  by 
traffic  with  slave-dealers.  Their  own  interest  is  promoted  by  sending 
out  of  the  country  the  productions  of  the  soil  and  of  the  forest,  rather 
than  their  fellow-men.  And  Western  Africa  is  extremely  rich  in  the 
staples  of  commerce.  It  is  capable  of  producing  cotton  to  almost  any 
extent.  Rice  and  palm  oil,  ebony  and  other  valuable  kinds  of  wood, 
the  gum  used  in  India-rubber  manufactures,  ivory,  and  many  other 
important  articles  of  commerce,  can  be  supplied  in  ample  measure ; 
while,  on  the  other  hand,  the  Africans  are  an  imitative  and  an  “ improv- 


30  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


mg”  people,  anxious  to  possess  articles  of  European  and  American 
manufacture,  willing  to  work  for  them,  and  full  of  enterprise  and 
ingenuity  in  using  means  to  obtain  them.  With  thirty-five  millions  of 
such  a people,  living  in  a country  of  exuberant  fertility,  at  a distance 
of  but  a few  weeks’  sail  from  British  and  American  seaports,  what  can 
prevent  an  immense  amount  of  commerce  being  created  within  no  far- 
distant  period  ? 

The  principal  means  of  Africa’s  redemption  is  the  blessed  gospel 
of  the  grace  of  God.  This  will  effect  the  greatest  changes,  when 
other  means  prove  fruitless.  A divine  power  makes  this  agency 
effectual  in  the  change  of  character,  habits,  and  pursuits.  Under  its 
influence,  old  things  pass  away,  all  things  become  new.  This  mighty 
leaven  is  already  at  work  ; its  effects  are  visible  and  wonderful.  The 
briefest  statement  of  missionary  returns  will  prove  surprising  to  many, 
and  gratifying  to  all  who  have  at  heart  the  welfare  of  this  long-neg- 
lected part  of  the  world.  The  English  Baptist,  Episcopal  and  Wes- 
leyan Societies,  the  Scotch  United  Presbyterian,  the  German,  the 
American  Baptist,  Congregational,  Episcopal,  Methodist,  and  Pres- 
byterian bodies  are  all  engaged  in  missionary  work  in  Western  Africa. 
They  support  over  one  hundred  ministers  of  the  gospel  at  various  sta- 
tions, with  a considerable  number  of  assistant  missionaries.  Over 
13,000  communicants,  including  about  1,000  in  Liberia  who  are  mostly 
of  American  birth,  were  reported  last  year  in  connection  with  the 
churches.  The  greater  part  of  these  are  members  of  the  English 
Episcopal  and  Wesleyan  churches  in  Sierra  Leone  ; but  over  1,600  are 
members  of  the  English  Wesleyan  churches  on  the  Gambia,  at  Cape 
Coast,  and  in  the  kingdom  of  Ashantee,  and  over  200  are  members  of 
English  Episcopal  churches  in  Abbeokuta  and  Badagry.  Considering 
the  recent  origin  of  most  of  the  missions  and  the  formidable  hinder- 
ances  to  their  success,  these  returns  are  most  cheering.  They  appear 
to  warrant  the  opinion,  that  in  no  part  of  the  missionary  field  may  the 
Church  of  Christ  look  for  more  immediate  and  extended  success  than 
in  Western  Africa. 

The  most  serious  obstacle  to  missionary  labor  in  this  part  of  the 
world  is  the  unhealthiness  of  the  country  to  foreigners.  The  climate 
is  not  deleterious  to  the  natives,  who  are  described  as  physically  a vig- 


orous and  long-lived  people  ; but  foreigners  are  subject  to  fevers  which 
often  prove  fatal.  Unusual  mortality  has  marked  the  progress  of  the 
missionary  work  on  this  coast.  This  may  have  been  owing  partly  to 
the  want  of  prudence  in  some  cases,  and  in  others  to  the  want  of 
proper  care  and  treatment.  The  methods  of  guarding  against  disease 
and  of  dealing  with  it  are  better  understood  now  than  in  former  years. 
Much  greater  stress  is  now  laid  on  the  selection  of  missionaries  with 
health  suited  to  the  climate,  and  the  chpice  of  stations  not  exposed  to 
malaria  from  neighboring  marshes  or  to  other  local  causes  of  disease. 
As  a result  of  these  precautions,  the  instances  of  sickness  and  death 
have  been  diminished.  It  must  be  conceded,  however,  that  the  climate 
of  this  part  of  Africa  will  still  prove  more  or  less  injurious  to  the 
health  of  those  who  have  been  brought  up  in  northern  latitudes.  Yet 
this  consideration  should  not  receive  more  than  its  proper  weight  in 
the  scale  of  Christian  duty.  The  missionary  work  is  surely  worthy  of 
greater  sacrifices  than  the  enterprises  of  men  engaged  in  commerce  or 
other  secular  pursuits,  which  now  employ  the  services  of  some  two 
thousand  white  people  on  the  coast  of  Western  Africa.  The  slave- 
traders  for  long  years  encountered  the  risks  of  the  climate,  living  at 
all  points  on  the  coast,  in  the  prosecution  of  their  infamous  business. 
The  servants  of  Christ  must  not  shrink  from  equal  or  greater  danger 
in  obeying  his  last  commandment.  He  knew  all  the  risks  of  climate 
when  he  required  them  to  preach  his  gospel  to  every  creature ; and  the 
promise  of  his  own  presence  with  them  will  be  sweet  and  precious  in  pro- 
portion to  the  sincerity  of  their  faith  and  the  difficulties  of  their  work. 
Their  instrumentality  in  the  salvation  of  lost  souls  in  Africa  cannot  be 
dispensed  with,  and  will  not  fail  at  last  to  be  richly  rewarded. ' 

The  missions  of  the  Board  in  Africa  are  found  in  Liberia, — at 
Monrovia,  Sinoe,  Kentucky,  and  Settra  Kroo  ; and  near  the  Equator, 
on  the  island  of  Corisco.  These  are  two  distinct  missionary  fields, 
distant  from  each  other  more  than  a thousand  miles.  Each  has  its 
own  features  of  interest,  and  both  are  highly  important  spheres  of 
Christian  benevolence. 

The  mission  to  Liberia  was  commenced  in  1832,  but  has  been 
repeatedly  suspended,  on  account  of  the  death  or  the  return  to  this 
country  of  the  missionaries.  The  Bev.  Messrs.  John  B.  Pinney  and 


MISSIONS  IN  W 


Joseph  Barr  were  the  brethren  first  appointed  to  this  field.  Mr.  Barr 
was  called  suddenly  to  his  rest  by  an  attack  of  cholera  in  Richmond, 
Va.,  while  on  his  way  to  embark  for  Africa.  His  removal  was  a 
serious  loss,  as  he  was  a man  qualified  by  nature  and  grace  for  eminent 
usefulness.  The  union  of  energy  and  prudence  with  vigorous  health 
seemed  to  point  him  out  as  admirably  suited  to  the  work  which  he  had 
in  view.  But  “ the  Lord’s  ways  are  not  as  our  ways.” 

Mr.  Pinney  proceeded  alone  on  his  mission,  and  arrived  at  Monrovia 
in  February,  1833.  After  a few  months  spent  in  making  the  requisite 
inquiries  and  arrangements,  he  l'eturned  on  a visit  to  this  country  to 
confer  with  the  Committee  concerning  the  plans  of  the  mission,  and  to 
enlist  recruits  for  its  service.  Previous  to  his  return,  two  brethren  had 
been  accepted  as  missionaries  for  this  field ; and  in  November  the 
missionary  company,  consisting  of  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Pinney,  Laird,  and 
Cloud,  with  Mrs.  Laird,  and  Mr.  James  Temple,  a colored  young  man, 
who  was  a candidate  for  the  ministry,  embarked  at  Norfolk  for  Liberia. 
Most  of  these  laborers  were  not  allowed  to  continue,  by  reason  of 
death.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Laird  and  Mr.  Cloud  were  called  to  their  rest 
within  a few  months  after  their  arrival  at  Monrovia,  leaving  a memo- 
rial of  piety  singularly  pure  and  devoted.  Mr.  Temple  returned  to  the 
United  States,  and  Mr.  Pinney  was  again  left  alone  in  the  mission. 
For  a time  he  discharged  the  duties  of  Governor  of  the  colony  with 
great  benefit  to  all  its  interests ; but  withdrawing  from  this  post  as 
soon  as  it  was  practicable  for  him  to  resign  its  duties,  he  resumed  his 
missionary  labors.  Having  been  joined  in  September,  1834,  by  Mr.  J. 
F.  C.  Finley,  Mr.  Pinney  had  a house  built  for  the  use  of  the  mission 
on  a small  farm,  at  Millsburgh,  a few  miles  from  Monrovia.  One  or 
two  colored  assistants  were  engaged  as  teachers  for  schools  among  the 
natives ; and  Mr.  E.  Tytler,  a colored  man  and  a licensed  preacher, 
was  employed  among  the  Bassas,  a native  tribe,  at  a station  selected 
by  Mr.  Pinney  on  the  river  John,  eighteen  miles  from  the  sea. 

Tho  health  of  Messrs.  Pinney  and  Finley  having  given  way,  they 
were  compelled  to  return  to  this  country  in  1835  * Mr.  Tytler  con- 

*  Mr.  Finley  afterwards  returned  to  Africa  in  connection,  I believe,  with  the  Coloni- 
zation Society ; but  was  murdered  by  natives,  who  supposed  that  he  was  in  possession  of 
a large  sum  of  money. 


ESTERN  AFRICA.  31 


ducted  a small  school  for  two  or  three  years  longer  among  the  Bassas, 
but  no  very  encouraging  results  appear  to  have  followed  his  labors. 
The  mission  was  now  virtually  suspended. 

Considerable  hesitation  was  felt  about  resuming  the  work  of  missions 
in  Africa.  The  loss  of  several  valuable  lives,  and  the  failure  of  the 
health  of  other  brethren,  proved  extremely  discouraging  to  many  per- 
sons. Yet  others  were  clear  in  their  convictions  that  the  Church  ought 
not  to  abandon  this  missionary  field.  The  door  was  open,  and  all  things 
invited  the  labors  of  the  servants  of  Christ,  with  the  exception  of 
the  deleterious  climate.  To  guard  against  this,  it  was  thought  that 
a more  healthy  station  could  be  found  than  those  previously  occupied, 
and  it  was  considered  expedient  for  missionaries  to  return  after  a few 
years  to  their  native  country,  on  a visit  for  the  sake  of  health.  Brethren 
of  approved  qualifications  had  offered  themselves  specially  for  this  field. 
It  appeared  therefore  to  be  the  duty  of  the  Board  to  make  another  effort 
to  establish  this  mission. 

Accordingly  in  1839  the  Rev.  Oren  K.  Canfield  and  Mr.  Jonathan 
P.  Alward,  with  Mr.  Pinney,  the  pioneer  of  the  mission,  made  an  ex- 
ploring visit  along  the  coast  for  nearly  a hundred  and  fifty  miles,  dur- 
ing which  they  were  led  to  select  a station  among  the  Knoo  people, 
about  half-way  between  Cape  Palmas  and  Monrovia.  An  interesting 
account  of  the  Kroos  is  given  in  the  Annual  Report  of  the  Board  for 
1840.  They  are  described  as  the  most  intelligent  and  enterprising  of 
the  natives  on  the  western  coast,  having  farms  in  a high  state  of  culti- 
vation, and  always  opposed  to  the  slave-trade.  Their  distinctive  name 
is  probably  derived  from  the  fact  that  many  of  them  are  employed 
as  crews  on  board  of  trading-vessels.  This  leads  them  to  visit  various 
parts  of  the  coast,  although  they  commonly  return  to  their  own  coun- 
try after  a few  years  spent  in  this  service. 

The  return  of  African  fever  soon  forbade  Mr.  Pinney’s  attempt  to 
resume  his  missionary  labors ; but  the  other  brethren  enjoyed  good 
health,  and  after  completing  their  exploration,  they  returned  home, 
were  married,  and  Mr.  Alward  was  ordained ; and  then  they  proceeded, 
in  February,  1841,  to  their  chosen  work,  with  many  hopes  of  a useful 
if  not  a long  life.  These  hopes  were  destined  to  be  disappointed.  Mr. 
Alward  was  called  to  his  rest  in  the  following  April,  and  Mr.  Canfield 


MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS 


33 


in  May  of  the  next  year.  They  were  both  men  of  devoted  piety,  and 
were  qualified  to  be  eminently  useful  in  the  missionary  work.  Their 
bereaved  companions  returned  to  their  friends  in  this  country  ; and  for 
a month  the  station  was  under  the  charge  of  a colored  female  teacher, 
who  had  accompanied  Messrs.  Canfield  and  Alward.  The  Rev.  Robert 
W.  Sawyer  and  his  wife,  who  had  arrived  at  Monrovia  in  December, 
1841,  then  succeeded  the  brethren  whom  they  had  hoped  to  join  at 
Settra  Kroo  ; but  in  December,  1843,  Mr.  Sawyer  was  called  to  join 
them  in  the  Saviour’s  presence.  He  was  a man  worthy  to  be  their 
associate,  both  in  the  church  on  earth  and  in  heaven.  Previous  to 
his  death,  schools  had  been  established,  and  at  one  time  thirty  boys 
and  six  girls  were  boarded  and  lodged  on  the  mission  premises,  enjoy- 
ing the  benefits  of  Christian  instruction  and  example. 

In  the  year  1842,  three  colored  ministers  became  connected  with  the 
mission.  One  of  these,  the  Rev.  James  Eden,  had  been  for  some  years 
at  Monrovia,  where  he  was  pastor  of  the  Presbyterian  church.  This 
station  he  continued  to  occupy  until  his  peaceful  death,  at  an  advanced 
age,  in  1846.  The  Rev.  Thomas  Wilson  and  the  Rev.  James  M.  Priest 
reached  Monrovia  in  1842.  Mr.  Wilson’s  station  was  at  Sinou,  where, 
however,  he  was  not  permitted  long  to  labor,  having  been  called  to  his 
reward  in  1846.  He  was  a man  of  energy,  and  his  talents  and  piety 
gave  promise  of  no  ordinary  usefulness.  Mr.  Priest  was  at  first  stationed 
at  Settra  Kroo,  but  removed  to  the  station  at  Sinou  in  1846,  where  he 
has  been  much  encouraged  in  his  work.  Mr.  Washington  McDonough, 
a colored  teacher,  was  sent  out  also  in  1842,  and  he  has  continued  to 
be  connected  with  a station  among  the  Kroos  until  the  present  time. 

At  Settra  Kroo  the  education  of  native  youth  continued  to  engage 
| the  attention  of  Mrs.  Sawyer,  who  with  great  devotedness  had  remained 
) at  her  post,  although  she  was  the  only  white  woman  within  sixty  miles 
of  the  station.  She  was  assisted  by  Mr.  McDonough,  and  by  Cecilia 
Yan  Tyne,  an  excellent  colored  teacher,  until  the  return  of  the  latter 
for  health  in  1844.  In  the  same  year  the  Rev.  James  M.  Con- 
nelly joined  the  mission,  with  whom  Mrs.  Sawyer  was  united  in  mar- 
riage in  the  following  December.  They  continued  at  Settra  Kroo, 
engaged  in  faithful  efforts  for  the  conversion  of  the  people,  but  meeting 
with  no  marked  encouragement,  until  they  were  compelled  to  return 


to  this  country  by  the  failure  of  health  in  1850.  Since  that  time  the 
station  among  the  Kroos  has  been  under  the  care  of  Mr.  McDonough 
a small  school  has  been  maintained,  but  no  brighter  days  have  been 
witnessed.  Seldom  have  we  known  a mission  commenced  with  more 
deliberate  and  well-informed  judgment,  conducted  by  more  devoted 
and  thoroughly  qualified  men,  and  resulting  in  more  disastrous  and 
apparently  fruitless  events.  Yet  the  events  have  not  been  fruitless, 
though  no  record  of  conversions  has  been  made.  The  piety  of  so 
many  of  Christ’s  servants,  their  self-denial,  their  willingness  to  peril 
life  itself  for  the  salvation  of  the  heathen , their  happy  though  brief 
missionary  life,  their  peaceful  death — all  these  have  yielded  fruit,  surely, 
in  the  churches  at  home,  if  not  among  the  hardened  Kroo  people ; and 
their  record  is  on  high, — their  crown  of  rejoicing  is  the  brighter  after 
being  gained  in  the  dark  laud  of  Africa. 

In  January,  1847,  the  Rev.  Harrison  W.  Ellis,  a colored  man,  for- 
merly a slave,  who  with  his  family  had  been  redeemed  .from  bondage 
by  Christian  friends  in  the  South,  was  sent  as  a missionary  to  Monro- 
via. As  he  possessed  considerable  talent  and  energy,  and  had  acquired 
more  than  ordinary  learning  for  a person  so  unfavorably  situated,  it 
wras  reasonable  to  expect  that  his  efforts  to  do  good  would  prove  en- 
couraging to  those  wrho  had  taken  such  a kind  and  liberal  interest  in 
his  welfare.  He  was  for  some  time  minister  of  the  church  in  Monrovia, 
and  gave  some  attention  to  a school ; but  he  is  not  now  connected 
with  either.  To  the  want  of  grace — more  grace — may  be  ascribed 
his  not  fulfilling  the  expectations  of  his  friends  ; but  we  wmuld  hope 
that  he  may  yet  become  a useful  laborer  in  the  vineyard  of  the  Lord. 
At  Kentucky,  a settlement  a few  miles  from  Monrovia,  Mr.  H.  W. 
Erskine,  a colored  teacher  and  a licentiate  preacher,  has  been  stationed 
since  1849,  and  has  met  with  much  encouragement  in  his  work.  About 
twenty  members  are  connected  with  the  church  at  this  station.  Mr. 
B.  Y.  R.  James,  another  colored  teacher,  who  had  been  for  some  years 
under  the  patronage  of  a Society  of  ladies  in  New  York  for  promoting 
education  in  Africa,  became  connected,  at  the  instance  of  his  former 
patrons,  with  the  mission  of  the  Board  at  Monrovia  in  1849.  He  has 
continued  to  be  faithfully  and  successfully  employed  in  a large  school 
at  that  place. 


MISSIONS  IN  WEST  E UN  AFRICA.  33 


The  Rev.  David  A.  Wilson  and  his  wife  arrived  at  Monrovia  in 
July,  1850.  Mr.  Wilson  joined  this  mission  with  a special  view  to  the 
work  of  Christian  education,  and  he  has  had  the  charge  of  the  Alex- 
ander High  School,  an  academy  established  by  the  Board  in  1849. 
The  number  of  scholars  has  never  been  large,  but  their  progress  in 
study  has  evinced  capacity  to  make  respectable  acquirements.  This 
institution,  it  is  hoped,  will  train  up  many  young  men  for  the  Church 
*and  the  State.  It  may  form  the  germ  of  a college  in  future  years. 
Besides  teaching  in  this  academy,  Mr.  Wilson  preaches  to  the  church, 
at  present  without  a pastor.  His  work  is  one  of  vital  importance  to 
Liberia.  A republican  form  of  government  can  be  maintained  only 
by  an  intelligent  and  virtuous  people,  whose  rulers  and  other  men  of 
influence  have  been  trained  in  Christian  schools,  under  the  charge  of 
competent  instructors. 

The  repeated  bereavements  of  the  mission  on  the  Liberia  coast  had 
led  to  the  inquiry  whether  a more  healthy  location  could  not  be  dis- 
covered elsewhere ; and  the  comparative  exemption  from  fever  enjoyed 
by  the  missionaries  of  the  American  Board  on  the  Gaboon  river,  turned 
the  attention  of  many  to  the  region  near  the  Equator.  Accordingly, 
in  1849  the  Rev.  Messrs.  James  L.  Mackey  and  George  W.  Simpson  and 
their  wives  went  out  to  form  a new  mission  in  this  part  of  the  African 
field.  They  were  greatly  aided  in  their  inquiries  by  the  counsels  of 
the  brethren  connected  with  the  American  Board,  and  particularly  of 
the  Rev.  J.  Leighton  Wilson,  a respected  minister  of  our  body,  who 
had  been  long  a missionary, — first  at  Cape  Palmas  and  afterwards  at  the 
Gaboon, — and  who  is  now  one  of  the  Secretaries  of  the  Board.  After 
making  full  examination  of  various  places,  they  were  led  to  select  the 
island  of  Corisco  as  their  station.  This  is  a small  island,  four  miles  long 
from  north  to  south,  and  about  the  same  in  breadth  at  the  south  end, 
but  at  the  north  not  exceeding  a mile, — having  a circumference  of 
about  fifteen  miles,  and  an  irregular  surface,  diversified  with  narrow 
valleys  and  steep  hills  of  no  great  height.  It  is  fifty-five  miles  north 
of  the  equator,  and  from  fifteen  to  twenty  miles  from  the  mainland. 
Its  population  is  about  ijOOO,  and  its  situation,  midway  in  the  sea-line 
of  the  Bay  of  Corisco,  affords  a ready  access  to  people  of  the  same 


language,  the  Benga,  who  live  on  the  shores  of  the  bay  and  on  the  sea- 
coast.  In  this  part  of  Africa  there  are  no  roads,  and  journeys  can  be 
most  conveniently  made  in  boats  along  the  coast  or  on  the  rivers,  so 
that  the  situation  of  the  missionaries  on  an  island  is  rather  an  advan- 
tage than  a hinderance  to  their  intercourse  with  the  natives.  The 
chief  inducement,  however,  for  choosing  Corisco  as  the  site  of  the  mis- 
sion, was  the  hope  that  it  would  prove  a healthy  place.  It  contains 
few  local  causes  of  disease,  while  it  is  removed  from  the  malaria  of  the 
coast  on  the  mainland,  and  enjoys  the  atmosphere  of  the  sea. 

Thus  far  the  missionaries  have  enjoyed  remarkable  health  for  foreign- 
ers in  Africa.  Mrs.  Mackey  was  early  called  to  her  rest  by  a disease 
not  connected  with  her  new  abode.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Simpson,  in  the 
mysterious  providence  of  God,  were  lost  at  sea  with  all  on  board  the 
ship  except  a native  sailor,  their  vessel  having  been  struck  by  a typhoon. 
This  sad  event  occurred  in  April,  1851,  causing  great  sorrow  to  the 
friends  of  this  new  mission.  The  other  missionaries — Mr.  Mackey,  Miss 
Sweeny,  who  embarked  for  Corisco  in  August,  1851,  and  was  married 
to  Mr.  Mackey  in  1852,  and  the  Rev.  George  McQueen,  Jr.,  who 
joined  the  mission  in  the  same  year — have  all  enjoyed  good  health. 
The  Rev.  Messrs.  Edwin  T.  Williams  and  William  Clemens  and  their 
wives  sailed'  for  Corisco  in  August  last. 

Small  schools  for  boys  and  girls  have  been  opened,  religious  worship 
has  been  conducted  on  the  Lord’s-day,  and  Mr.  Mackey  has  exerted  a 
happy  influence  over  the  natives  by  his  medical  skill.  Already  many 
of  their  superstitious  practices  have  been  abandoned,  the  Sabbath  is 
in  some  degree  honored,  and  the  influence  of  the  mission  is  visible  in 
the  improved  conduct  of  the  people.  The  principal  employment  of 
the  missionaries,  however,  has  been  the  acquisition  of  the  native  lan- 
guage. Some  interesting  tours  have  been  made  on  the  mainland,  one 
extending  nearly  one  hundred  and  fifty  miles  into  the  interior,  which 
have  tended  to  confirm  the  hope  that  this  mission  will  afford  a door  of 
entrance  to  a very  large  population.  Its  location  on  an  island  may 
remind  the  reader  of  the  celebrated  island  of  Iona,  on  the  borders  of 
Scotland — the  home  of  a Presbyterian  and  missionary  clergy  in  the 
sixth  century.  May  Corisco  become  to  Africa  what  Iona  was  to  Great 
Britain,  Ireland,  and  many  parts  of  the  continent  of  Europe ! 


IV. 

MISSIONS  IN  NORTH  INDIA. 

“S  am  fount)  of  tjem  that  sought  me  not.” 


One  of  the  earliest  of  the  missions  to  which  these  pages  are  devoted, 
was  formed  in  North  India.  It  has  also  become  one  of  the  largest  mis- 
sions ; so  that  a full  account  of  its  history  cannot  be  given  in  this  work. 
Referring  the  reader  for  more  particular  information  to  two  books  by 
missionaries  of  the  Board,*  I would  aim  here  at  giving  merely  a gen- 
eral view  of  India  as  a missionary  field,  and  of  the  Presbyterian  mis- 
sions in  its  north-western  provinces. 

The  country  to  which  the  title  of  India  is  now  commonly  applied, 
forms  a well-defined  part  of  south-eastern  Asia.  It  is  bounded  on  the 
north-east  by  the  Himalaya  Mountains ; on  the  north-west  by  the  river 
Indus,  and  on  other  sides  by  the  Indian  Ocean  and  the  bay  of  Bengal. 
From  Cape  Comorin,  in  north  latitude  8°,  to  Cashmere,  in  34°,  its 
length  is  about  1,900  miles ; and  its  greatest  breadth,  from  the  mouth 
of  the  Indus  to  Burmah,  is  about  1,500  miles.  Owing  to  its  irregular 
figure,  its  area  may  be  stated  at  about  1,280,000  square  miles,  being 
nearly  the  same  as  that  of  the  old  twenty-six  States  of  our  confederacy. 

Some  parts  of  this  vast  territory  are  mountainous,  though  they  are 
under  cultivation  to  a considerable  extent.  At  the  north-west  some 
districts  are  nearly  deserts  of  sand,  while  extensive  deltas  at  the 

* Two  Yeaes  in  TTppeb  India:  by  John  C.  Lowrie.  Hew  York:  Kobert  Carter  & 
Brothers.  1850. 

Missions  in  Hindustan  : By  James  B.  Campbell.  Philadelphia : George  H.  Stuart. 
1852. 


mouth  of  the  Ganges  and  some  other  rivers  are  also  uninhabitable. 
The  greater  part  of  the  country,  however,  possesses  a rich  soil,  which 
is  mostly  under  cultivation,  and  which,  under  the  heat  and  moisture  of 
a tropical  climate,  produces  a large  supply  of  food  and  clothing  for 
its  own  inhabitants,  and  some  of  the  most  valuable  articles  of  com- 
merce with  foreign  nations.  The  people  of  India,  estimated  at  150,- 
000,000,  are  clothed  to  a great  extent  from  the  cotton  grown  in  certain 
districts ; and  the  production  of  this  important  article  might,  no  doubt, 
be  greatly  increased.  Sugar,  indigo,  opium,  and  rice,  are  leading  sta- 
ples of  Indian  commerce.  Rice  forms  a large  part  of  the  food  of  the 
natives,  and  is  exported  to  foreign  countries.  In  the  northern  pro- 
vinces, wheat  and  other  grains  are  cultivated. 

The  Hindus  differ  from  each  other  in  their  appearance,  and  probably 
in  their  origin.  Their  complexion  varies  from  a dark  to  an  olive  color, 
according  to  the  part  of  the  country  in  which  they  live,  their  exposure 
to  the  sun,  and  their  occupation.  In  some  provinces,  as  in  Bengal, 
they  are  a slightly-built,  effeminate  race ; in  others,  as  in  Rajpootana, 
and  other  north-western  provinces,  they  are  a muscular,  vigorous  peo- 
ple— the  men  looking  quite  warlike,  with  their  match-locks,  shields, 
and  swords.  They  are  by  no  means  a savage  race.  A certain  kind  of 
civilization  has  existed  for  centuries.  They  are  found  cultivating  the 
soil  as  their  chief  employment,  but  carpenters,  blacksmiths,  weavers, 
dyers,  gardeners,  grooms,  cooks,  barbers,  teachers,  learned  men,  sol- 


GrndaJ, 


'Ticarvpoott 


\nrmdtly 


JLNJDJLA 


Malacca 


Suxqtip  or 


MISSIONS  IN  NORTH  INDIA.  35 


diers,  priests,  and  other  classes,  show  a civilized  state  of  society — 
though  these  terms  do  not  describe  occupations  or  professions  at  all  so 
advanced  as  we  meet  with  in  western  nations.  Their  habits  of  life 
are  simple,  and  for  the  most  part  regular.  Two  meals  a day,  chiefly  of 
vegetable  food,  with  no  other  beverage  than  water,  supply  their  wants. 
There  are  some  men  of  wealth,  but  the  most  of  the  people  are 
extremely  poor.  Hard-working  men,  in  the  fields  or  on  boats,  are  glad 
to  obtain  three  rupees  a month  for  wages,  or  less  than  a dollar  and  a 
half,  out  of  which  they  must  find  themselves.  Their  hope  of  better 
circumstances  depends  on  Christianity.  This  will  set  them  free  from 
idolatry  and  superstition,  which  now  consume  much  of  their  time  and 
property.  It  will  break  the  yoke  of  caste  and  allow  scope  for  enter- 
prise. It  will  substitute  the  holy  day  of  rest  for  numerous  festivals, 
demoralizing  and  expensive.  It  will  teach  them  truth,  integrity,  con- 
tentment, domestic  happiness,  so  needful  to  all  mpn,  but  especially  to 
the  poor.  Religion  will  then  be  their  best  support,  instead  of  being, 
as  it  surely  is  now,  their  greatest  burden. 

It  is  difficult  to  describe  clearly  the  religion  of  the  Hindus.  Con- 
flicting views  are  given  in  their  sacred  books.  Some  writers  maintain 
the  unity  of  the  Divine  nature ; others,  pantheistic  notions ; others 
still,  polytheism ; many  are  fond  of  metaphysical  subtleties ; more 
delight  in  foolish  legends  and  corrupting  histories — such  as  the  exploits 
of  the  god  Krishna.  Their  sacred  writings  are  very  voluminous,  and 
contain  many  just  sentiments  and  good  precepts ; but  they  contain  also 
greater  quantities  of  nonsense  and  depravity  than  could  probably  be 
found  in  the  literature  of  all  other  nations. 

Some  authors  have  attempted  to  treat  this  religion  as  if  it  were  a 
logical  system.  They  speak  of  Brahm  as  regarded  by  the  Hindus  as 
a pure  and  original  spirit,  pervading  all  things,  but  existing  in  an 
unconscious  state  until,  suddenly  awakening,  he  created  in  illusion  (or 
caused  the  images  of  objects  to  appear)  the  universe,  and  the  seeds  of 
things  that  should  exist ; he  then  gave  existence  to  Brahma,  Vishnu, 
and  Shiv,  and  committing  to  them  the  further  conduct  of  the  world,  he 
relapsed  into  unconsciousness.  As  a spirit  taking  no  interest  in  the 
affairs  of  men,  Brahm  receives  no  worship  whatever.  The  triad, 
Brahma,  the  creator,  Vishnu,  the  preserver,  and  Shiv,  the  destroyer, 


are  supposed  to  represent  the  three  conditions  of  all  finite  existence. 
The  two  latter  are  worshipped  over  all  India ; some  of  the  Shasters 
declare  that  Brahma  was  doomed  by  the  gods  not  to  be  worshipped,  on 
account  of  his  incestuous  conduct.  Innumerable  lesser  divinities,  gods, 
and  goddesses,  are  also  worshipped  in  various  places,  at  particular 
times,  or  for  special  jurisdiction  over  the  affairs  of  human  life,  each  by 
his  own  followers.  A goddess  is  worshipped  by  thieves  and  murderers ; 
another  is  invoked  for  the  removal  of  the  small-pox ; a god  presides 
over  the  fields,  &c.  Whatever  theory  may  be  advanced  in  order  to 
systematize  the  religious  belief  of  the  Hindus,  or  however  their  learned 
men  may  speculate  on  the  metaphysical  and  actual  relations  of  the 
gods  to  each  other  and  to  human  beings,  it  seems  to  be  quite  certain 
that  practically  this  religion  is  neither  more  nor  less  than  a heterogene- 
ous compound  of  gross  idolatry.  The  symbol  of  Shiv  may  help  the 
learned  worshipper  to  meditate  on  the  object  of  his  devotion,  but  it  is 
itself  worshipped  devoutly  by  nearly  all  who  resort  to  its  temple. 
Not  only  are  images  of  various  sizes  and  figures— constructed  out  of 
clay,  stone,  wood,  or  metal — the  objects  of  religious  worship,  but  cer- 
tain trees,  stones,  and  rivers.  The  Ganges  is  a goddess,  and  receives 
worship  from  most  of  those  who  live  on  its  banks,  and  from  multitudes 
who  resort  to  it  from  distant  parts  of  the  country.  To  bathe  in  its 
waters  is  a sure  way  to  become  free  from  sin ; to  die  on  its  banks, 
drinking  its  water  and  invoking  its  name,  is  a passport  to  heaven. 
Thousands  of  worshippers  may  be  seen  every  day  paying  their  homage 
to  this  river,  and  in  many  places  the  sick  and  dying  are  exposed  on  its 
banks,  under  the  burning  sun  by  day,  and  in  the  damp  air  at  night,  in 
the  hope  of  thereby  ending  life  in  peace,  and  going  at  once  to  a better 
world. 

The  doctrine  of  the  transmigration  of  the  soul,  or  its  passage  from 
one  body  into  another,  is  a part  of  this  religion.  This  idea  of  a suc- 
cession of  births  into  higher  or  lower  beings,  according  to  the  conduct, 
has  great  influence  over  the  Hindus.  To  deter  men  from  killing  Brah- 
mans, for  instance,  Manu,  the  great  lawgiver,  enacts,  that  “ the  slayer 
of  a Brahman  must  enter  into  the  body  of  a dog,  a boar,  an  ass,  a 
camel,  a bull,  a goat,  a sheep,  a stag,  a bird,  a low  person,  or  a demon.” 
The  common  abstinence  from  meat  as  food,  results  theoretically  from 


36  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


this  belief ; otherwise,  meh  might  kill  and  eat  the  bodies  of  their  rela- 
tives or  friends.  One  of  the  effects  of  this  opinion  is  similar  to  that 
of  a belief  in  purgatory — it  serves  as  a sedative  to  the  conscience; 
men  may  be  punished  for  their  sin  by  an  evil  birth,  but  they  will  hope 
to  escape  from  it  by  some  meritorious  act, — it  is  not  considered  an 
irrevocable  sentence. 

Hardly  any  thing  in  Hinduism  is  more  pernicious  than  the  system 
of  caste.  The  Brahmans  were  formed  from  the  mouth  of  the  deity,  to 
expound  his  will ; the  Kshetriyas  from  his  arms,  to  defend  the  Brah- 
mans ; the  Vaissyas  and  Sudras  from  his  body  and  feet,  to  provide  for 
and  serve  the  Brahmans — the  whole  doctrine  being  so  framed  as  to 
exalt  the  priestly  class  immeasurably  above  all  the  others.  Accord- 
ingly, Brahmans  are  held  in  the  highest  honor,  are  employed  in  all  the 
functions  of  religion,  are  entitled  to  exact  large  fees  from  the  lower 
classes  for  their  spiritual  services,  and  according  to  native  laws  are  in 
a great  measure  exempt  from  punishment  for  crimes.  The  four  leading 
divisions  of  caste  have  become  variously  subdivided,  so  that  now 
almost  every  occupation  in  life  belongs  to  a separate  class  of  people, 
who  neither  eat  together  nor  intermarry.  To  violate  any  of  the  rules 
of  caste,  is  to  forfeit  one's  standing,  and  in  most  cases  one’s  means  of 
subsistence.  This  system  interposes  a formidable  barrier,  therefore,  in 
the  way  of  the  spread  of  the  gospel.  For  a Brahman  and  a Sudra  to 
meet  together  at  a meal,  according  to  Hindu  notions  of  caste,  is  an 
impossibility.  But  no  distinctions  of  this  kind  can  be  recognized  at 
the  Lord’s  table,  nor  are  there  any  hereditary  privileged  orders  in  the 
Church  of  Christ;  the  rich  and  the  poor  meet  together  there  as 
brethren.  Moreover,  caste  is  a serious  hinderance  to  the  temporal 
improvement  of  the  natives,  forbidding  them  to  adopt  superior  methods 
of  agriculture  or  mechanical  employment.  In  this  respect,  the  severity 
of  the  system  will  eventually  hasten  its  overthrow ; it  will  be  found  to 
conflict  with  the  self-interest  of  men  of  all  classes. 

Want  of  space  precludes  any  description  here  of  the  temples,  festi- 
val-days, pilgrimages  to  holy  places,  ascetic  religious  orders,  and  other 
peculiarities  of  the  Hindu  religious  system.  The  indecencies,  suffering, 
and  frequent  loss  of  life  at  the  worship  of  some  of  the  principal 
gods ; the  sacrifice  of  widows  on  the  funeral-pile  of  their  husbands, 


and  the  destruction  of  infant  children  in  the  Ganges,  until  these  atroci- 
ties were  prohibited  by  the  British  authorities — deeds  recommended  as 
highly  meritorious  by  the  priests  ; the  continued  existence,  though  now 
nearly  suppressed  by  the  same  authorities,  of  a class  of  murderers, 
pursuing  their  dreadful  business  under  the  sanction  of  a goddess ; — these 
things  must  fill  every  Christian  mind  with  the  deepest  pity  for  those 
who  practise  or  suffer  them  in  the  name  of  religion.  Hinduism  may, 
indeed,  be  characterized  briefly  as  a religion  which  teaches  the  worship 
of  idols,  and  which  sanctions  by  its  examples  the  greatest  immorality  ; 
a religion  imposing  few  restraints  on  vice  and  crime,  burdensome  to  the 
rich,  oppressive  to  the  poor,  degrading  to  woman,  relentless  to  the 
widow,  regardless  of  children,  yielding  no  comfort  to  the  afflicted,  and 
to  the  dying  imparting  no  hope  of  heaven.  Such  a religion,  though 
its  age  be  reckoned  by  centuries,  and  its  votaries  by  hundreds  of 
millions,  must  yet  surely  fall.  God  is  merciful.  His  gospel  must  be 
preached  to  every  creature  in  India. 

The  greater  part  of  India  is  now  subject  to  Great  Britain.  In  this 
we  are  constrained  to  see  the  hand  of  a wonderful  and  wise  Provi- 
dence. To  human  view,  nothing  ever  occurred  in  the  affairs  of  men 
more  unlikely  to  have  taken  place,  than  the  present  relations  of  these 
nations.  Far  apart,  differing  widely  in  language,  social  life,  and  reli- 
gion, no  one  could  have  predicted  that  the  Hindus  and  the  British 
would  ever  live  under  the  same  government.  Looking  back  to  their 
earlier  history,  our  surprise  at  this  result  is  increased.  Less  than  two 
thousand  years  ago,  the  inhabitants  of  the  British  Isles  were  a rude, 
unenlightened,  powerless,  pagan  race  ; the  Hindus  were  then  as  now 
a people  of  vast  numbers,  far  superior  to  the  Celts  and  Piets,  the 
Angles  and  Saxons,  in  the  arts  and  occupations  of  civilized  life, 
but  equally  destitute  of  divine  knowledge.  The  gospel  was  intro- 
duced into  Great  Britain  by  missionaries,  and  became  the  means  of 
civilizing  and  elevating  its  inhabitants  ; the  virtue  inherent  in  the 
religion  of  the  Bible  is  the  true  secret  of  Anglo-Saxon  progress. 
The  Hindus  without  the  gospel  became  only  more  corrupt  in  morals, 
less  able  to  oppose  foreign  invasion,  and  increasingly  prepared  to  be 
the  subjects  of  any  despotism — native,  Moghul,  or  European.  See  the 
influence  of  Christianity,  by  example  and  contrast ! 


MISSIONS  IN  NORTH  INDIA.  37 


Less  than  four  hundred  years  ago,  the  Portuguese  appeared  to  be 
more  likely  than  any  other  Europeans  to  gain  dominion  in  the  East. 
They  were  the  first  to  obtain  a foothold  in  India  ; they  acquired  pos- 
session of  the  whole  Malabar  coast,  with  settlements  on  the  Coroman- 
del coast  and  the  Bay  of  Bengal,  and  made  Ceylon  tributary  to  them. 
They  were  then  one  of  the  chief  maritime  powers  of  Europe ; but 
they  were  votaries  of  Romanism,  a religion  containing  in  itself  the 
elements  of  decay.  The  connection  of  the  English  with  India  began 
a century  later,  when  they  were  feeling  the  new  energy  inspired  by 
having  the  Bible  open  and  free  in  their  native  islands.  See  an  exam- 
ple of  the  power  or  weakness  of  nations,  as  the  gospel  has  taken  root 
amongst  them,  or  has  been  supplanted  by  idolatry ! Portugal,  under 
the  withering  influence  of  the  Roman  Catholic  Church,  has  steadily 
declined  in  political  power  and  importance,  until  it  is  hardly  reckoned 
among  the  nations.  See  also  God’s  gracious  purpose ! It  was  not  his 
design  to  transfer  the  government  of  India  from  Mohammedans  to 
Romanists,  equally  shutting  out  the  light  of  the  gospel ; but  He  won- 
derfully overruled  the  wickedness  of  man,  and  made  the  wrath  of  man 
to  praise  him,  and  thereby  opened  the  door  for  the  missionary  of  the 
cross  to  nearly  all  parts  of  the  country,  from  Cape  Comorin  to  the 
Valley  of  Cashmere. 

The  political  relations  of  the  British  with  the  Hindus  are  often  the 
subject  of  remark  and  discussion.  I shall  not  enter  into  this,  further 
than  to  state  my  belief  that  most  of  the  Hindus  themselves  greatly 
prefer  their  present  rulers  to  any  that  have  preceded  them.  The 
native  princes  and  their  retainers,  who  have  lost  the  power  of  enriching 
themselves  at  the  expense  of  the  common  people,  would  no  doubt  like 
to  see  the  former  state  of  things  restored.  Some  other  classes  may 
prefer  the  old  regime,  but  generally  the  Hindus  possess  discernment 
enough  to  appreciate  the  advantages  of  a government  in  which  law 
reigns,  and  not  the  despotic  will  of  the  ruler.  But  whatever  opinions 
may  be  entertained  about  the  relations  of  Great  Britain  and  India,  the 
reflecting  Christian  cannot  fail  to  recognize  the  hand  of  the  Great 
Ruler  of  nations,  who  is  also  the  adorable  head  of  the  Church,  in  so 
disposing  the  events  of  his  providence  as  to  bring  this  heathen  people 
within  reach  of  the  gospel  of  his  grace. 


Powerful  causes  are  now  at  work,  which  will  eventually  overturn 
the  huge  fabric  of  idolatry  in  India.  Amongst  these,  the  influence  of 
the  government  as  administered  by  the  British  may  be  reckoned  as  of 
great  weight.  There  has  indeed  been  much  to  censure  in  the  connec- 
tion of  the  government  with  some  of  the  idol  temples,  although  the 
origin  and  nature  of  this  support  has  been  often  misunderstood.  In 
some  cases,  it  grew  out  of  the  change  of  rulers, — the  British  succeed- 
ing native  rulers,  who  had  set  apart  public  lands  or  funds  for  the 
endowment  of  certain  holy  places.  They  seem  to  have  considered 
themselves  bound  to  perpetuate  these  endowments,  overlooking  the 
obvious  fact,  that  the  State  support  of  any  religion  must  fall  or  change 
with  the  State  itself.  There  is  too  much  reason  to  fear,  however,  that 
the  chief  motive  for  continuing  to  support  the  native  temples  was  the 
desire  of  conciliating  the  natives,  thus  doing  evil  that  good  might 
come.  But  now  all  this  connection  of  the  government  with  idolatry 
has  ceased,  or  is  about  to  terminate ; and  the  Brahmans  can  no  longer 
appeal  to  the  presence  of  British  officials  at  their  religious  festivals, 
as  an  attestation  of  the  government  to  their  divine  character.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  administration  of  the  government  on  those  common 
principles  of  law  and  equity  which  prevail  in  Great  Britain  and  our 
own  country,  tends  silently  but  most  powerfully  to  break  down  some 
of  the  cardinal  points  of  Hinduism.  Brahmans  are  tried,  condemned, 
and  punished  for  crime  just  as  if  they  were  Sudras,  the  code  of  Manu 
to  the  contrary  notwithstanding  ; the  Thugs  are  executed  for  murder, 
though  they  have  prayed  to  the  goddess  Bhowani  for  protection,  and 
devoted  to  her  a part  of  their  blood-stained  spoils ; widows  are  not 
permitted  to  burn  themselves  to  death  with  the  dead  bodies  of  their 
husbands ; and  if  their  sons  or  other  friends  are  accessory  to  their  crema- 
tion, they  are  punished  for  their  unnatural  crime,  notwithstanding  the 
glowing  praises  of  the  Shastras,  so  lavishly  bestowed  on  those  who  on 
the  funeral-pile  purchase  happiness  for  themselves  and  their  friends. 
The  Hindus  see  that  the  government  of  the  country,  a power  which 
they  consider  to  be  little  less  than  divine,  is  arrayed  against  their  reli- 
gion. Gods  and  priests  and  holy  devotees  all  alike  give  way  before 
this  new  dynasty. 

The  progress  of  correct  knowledge  among  the  natives  of  India  is 


38  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


also  gradually  but  greatly  changing  their  religious  belief.  It  is  only  a 
small  number  of  the  Hindus  who  receive  any  kind  of  education.  The 
female  sex  are  excluded  by  universal  usage  from  learning  to  read  or 
to  write  ; and  most  of  the  laboring  classes  of  men  are  equally  ignorant. 
Some  of  the  Brahmans,  and  a few  others,  have  been  at  school,  but 
have  learnt  little  more  than  the  simplest  rudiments  ; while  those  who 
desire  to  become  learned  men  must  devote  themselves  to  works  full  of 
the  idle  legends  of  their  gods,  or  containing  metaphysical  speculations 
not  less  unprofitable,  or  teaching  errors  long  since  exploded  in  the 
western  world,  including  many  most  absurd  “ causes  of  things.”  All 
these  writings  appear  to  possess  a sacred  character  ; and  works  which 
teach  that  the  earth  rests  on  the  back  of  a tortoise,  or  which  ascribe 
an  eclipse  of  the  sun  to  an  immense  monster,  who  endeavors  to  devour 
the  orb  of  day,  are  held  in  equal  veneration  with  the  histories  of  the 
gods.  A lesson  in  a common-school  geography  will  prove  hostile  to 
many  of  these  sacred  dogmas.  Indeed,  all  knowledge  that  is  adapted 
to  emancipate  the  mind  from  superstition,  will,  among  the  Hindus,  tend 
to  overthrow  their  religion.  The  youth  who  are  taught  correct  meth- 
ods of  reasoning,  or  of  weighing  evidence,  will  soon  discard  the 
greater  part  of  their  sacred  writings.  The  effect  of  correct  know- 
ledge, however,  if  unaccompanied  by  Christian  truth,  is  only  destruc- 
tive so  far  as  religion  is  concerned.  Hinduism  is  perceived  to  be  false, 
pernicious,  and  every  way  oppressive,  and  may  be  altogether  discarded, 
while  yet  the  partially  enlightened  mind  fails  to  perceive  the  truth  of 
Christianity,  and  may  even  reject  the  claims  of  all  revealed  and  super- 
natural religion.  Precisely  this  is  the  state  of  mind  of  large  numbers 
of  Hindus  who  have  come  under  the  influence  of  European  knowledge. 
They  deny  their  own  faith,  but  they  equally  disown  religion  itself,  and 
foolishly  boast  of  reason  as  their  sole  guide.  This  is  a most  serious 
state  of  things  ; and  yet  the  first  part  of  this  process  must  be  under- 
gone by  the  Hindu  mind,  before  the  Christian  religion  can  be  embraced. 
The  government  schools,  from  which  Christianity  is  excluded,— as 
indeed  every  kind  of  religion  must  be  in  a country  where  the  people 
are  not  of  one  mind  ; — the  newspaper  press ; the  intercourse  of  Europe- 
ans with  the  natives ; the  progress  of  commerce,  steamboats,  railways, 
and  telegraph  wires ; — all  tend  directly  to  undermine  the  faith  of  the 


Hindus  in  their  own  religion.  They  do  not  impart,  however,  any 
knowledge  of  Christian  truth.  It  would  not  be  surprising  if  these 
causes  should  lead  to  an  entire  abandonment  of  Hinduism — nay,  such 
a result  is  inevitable ; and  to  this  extent,  these  agencies  are  doing  an 
important  work  for  the  Church  and  the  missionary.  They  prepare  the 
way  for  the  Bible  and  the  Christian  teacher.  But  at  the  same  time, 
the  Bible  and  the  missionary  are  indispensable,  in  order  to  save  the 
Hindus  from  infidelity.  They  are  indispensable  also  to  direct  them 
unto  “ the  Lamb  of  God  that  taketh  away  the  sin  of  the  world.” 

The  main  reliance  for  the  overthrow  of  Hinduism  as  a religion  is,  no 
doubt,  the  preaching  of  the  gospel.  The  religion  of  Christ  will  surely 
overturn  all  other  systems  of  religion,  whenever  its  divinely-appointed 
means  of  grace  are  made  known  to  men.  India  will  furnish  no  excep- 
tion to  this  remark.  Already  it  affords  many  exemplifications  of  its 
truth. 

Protestant  missions  in  this  country  were  first  commenced  in  South 
India  by  Ziegenbalg,  in  1705,  under  the  patronage  of  the  King  of  Den- 
mark. He  was  joined  by  others,  who  were  good  men  and  faithful  mis- 
sionaries, mostly  Germans.  In  1751  the  celebrated  Schwartz  com- 
menced his  course  in  the  same  part  of  the  country.  Considerable  suc- 
cess followed  their  labors  ; and  as  there  has  always  been  a larger  rela- 
tive number  of  missionaries  in  that  part  of  India  than  in  the  north  or 
west,  there  is  a much  more  widely-diffused  knowledge  and  profession  of 
Christianity  among  the  natives  than  can  be  found  elsewhere.  It  is 
within  comparatively  a recent  period  that  missionaries  began  their 
work  in  the  presidencies  of  Bengal  and  Bombay ; while  in  the  north- 
west provinces,  the  field  of  the  missions  of  the  Presbyterian  Church, 
it  is  not  more  than  twenty  years  since  these  missions  were  commenced. 
A few  excellent  men,  of  the  English  Baptist  and  Episcopal  Churches, 
had  been  previously  employed  at  far-distant  places  in  the  same  provinces. 

There  has  been  such  an  increase  of  zeal  in  the  Christian  world  for 
the  conversion  of  the  Hindus,  that  now  nearly  all  the  larger  missionary 
institutions  and  many  of  the  smaller  have  their  agents  at  work,  preach- 
ing the  gospel  in  various  ways,  supporting  schools  for  the  Christian 
education  of  the  young,  and  employing  the  press  in  printing  the  Word 
of  God  and  other  Christian  books.  From  carefully-collected  statistics 


MISSIONS  IN  NORTH  INDIA.  39 


published  last  year  in  a Calcutta  periodical,  it  appeared  that  there 
were  in  India,  at  the  beginning  of  the  year  1852,  missionaries  con- 
nected with  twenty-two  European  and  American  Societies,  to  the  num- 
ber of  four  hundred  and  forty-three,  of  whom  forty-eight  were  native 
ministers ; nearly  seven  hundred  native  catechists ; three  hundred  and 
thirty-one  churches,  containing  over  eighteen  thousand  native  communi- 
cants, with  over  one  hundred  thousand  native  Christians,  not  communi- 
cants ; upwards  of  thirteen  hundred  vernacular  schools,  in  which  nearly 
forty-eight  thousand  boys  were  scholars ; ninety-three  boarding-schools, 
with  nearly  twenty-five  hundred  native  boys ; and  one  hundred  and  two 
similar  schools,  with  over  twenty-seven  hundred  native  girls ; one  hun- 
dred and  twenty-six  superior  day-schools  for  education  in  English,  with 
nearly  fifteen  thousand  boys  and  young  men ; and  three  hundred  and 
forty-seven  day-schools  for  girls,  containing  nearly  twelve  thousand 
scholars — in  all  making  over  eighty  thousand  Hindu  children  and 
youth  receiving  a more  or  less  thorough  Christian  education. 

These  are  striking  statistics.  They  show  great  progress  already 
made.  They  betoken  still  greater  progress  in  the  next  few  years. 
Add  to  these  returns  the  statistics  of  the  press,  the  great  auxiliary  of 
the  modern  missionary,  and  it  is  with  increased  hope  that  we  look  for 
coming  triumphs.  We  are  informed  from  the  same  source,  that 
twenty-five  printing-presses  are  maintained  in  India  by  Missionary 
Societies ; and  that  the  Bible  has  been  translated  into  ten  languages, 
the  New  Testament  into  five  others,  and  separate  Gospels  into  four 
others  ; besides  numerous  works  prepared  in  these  different  languages 
for  native  Christians,  and  for  Mohammedans  and  Pagans.  The  far 
greater  part  of  this  immense  agency  has  been  brought  into  existence, 
we  are  further  informed,  within  the  last  twenty  years.  Well  may  the 
Church  exclaim,  in  view  of  such  facts  as  these,  What  hath  God 
wrought ! 

The  missions  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  in  India  were  commenced 
in  1833.  The  first  missionaries  were  the  Rev.  Messrs.  William  Reed 
and  John  C.  Lowrie,  and  their  wives,  who  arrived  at  Calcutta  in  Oc- 
tober of  that  year.  They  were  sent  out  by  the  Western  Foreign  Mis- 
sionary Society,  with  instructions  to  select  a station  in  some  part  of 


the  northern  provinces,  if  this  should  appear  to  be  expedient,  after  con- 
sulting with  Christian  friends  in  that  city ; otherwise,  they  were  at 
liberty  to  proceed  to  any  other  part  of  India,  or  of  the  Eastern  world. 
They  were  greatly  favored  in  obtaining  information  and  counsel  from 
several  gentlemen  who  were  largely  acquainted  with  the  country,  partic- 
ularly the  Rev.  William  H.  Pearce,  of  the  English  Baptist  mission,  the 
Rev.  Alexander  Duff,  D.D.,  of  the  Scotch  mission,  and  Sir  Charles 
Trevelyan,  K.  C.  B.,  one  of  the  Secretaries  in  the  political  department 
of  the  government,  who  had  himself  resided  in  the  Upper  Provinces. 
As  the  result  of  these  inquiries,  it  was  considered  advisable  to  proceed, 
as  originally  contemplated,  to  the  remote  north-western  part  of  the 
country ; and  the  city  of  Indiana,  on  the  river  Sutlej,  one  of  the  tribu- 
taries of  the  Indus,  was  chosen  as  the  station  to  be  first  occupied. 

The  principal  reasons  for  choosing  the  Upper  Provinces  as  their 
general  field  of  labor,  were  these  : The  urgent  need  of  missionaries  and 
teachers  in  that  part  of  the  country ; its  being  in  a great  measure  un- 
occupied as  missionary  ground ; the  superior  energy  of  the  people,  as 
compared  with  the  inhabitants  of  the  Lower  Provinces ; the  relation 
of  the  north-western  parts  of  India  to  other  Asiatic  countries,  west  and 
north,  which  suggested  the  hope  that  the  gospel  might  be  eventually 
extended  from  thence  into  the  heart  of  Central  Asia ; the  vicinity  of 
the  Himalaya  Mountains,  affording  places  of  resort  to  missionaries 
whose  health  might  become  impaired  by  the  hot  climate  of  the  plains. 
Besides  general  considerations  of  this  kind,  there  were  some  special  rea- 
sons, arising  out  of  the  liberal  views  concerning  the  education  of  the 
natives,  which  were  held  by  European  gentlemen  of  influence  at  some 
of  the  north-western  cities,  and  the  desire  of  some  of  the  native  chiefs 
to  obtain  for  their  sons  the  advantages  of  education  in  the  English 
language.  As  an  example  of  both,  Sir  Claude  Wade,  the  political 
agent  of  the  government  at  Lodiana,  had  set  on  foot  a school  for  the 
instruction  of  native  youth  in  English,  which  was  attended  by  sons  and 
other  relatives  of  certain  Sikh  Sardars  or  chiefs,  and  of  the  Affghan 
exiles  then  living  at  Lodiana.  This  school  was  afterwards  transferred 
to  the  mission,  and  the  generous  support  of  its  founder  was  continued 
until  his  official  duties  called  him  to  a distant  part  of  the  country.  It 
is  still  in  successful  operation. 


MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS- 


40 


The  missionaries  recognized  with  grateful  feelings  the  hand  of  Provi- 
dence, in  directing  the  time  of  their  arrival  in  India  at  the  precise 
juncture  of  circumstances  which  had  turned  the  attention  of  Christian 
observers  with  special  interest  to  the  north-western  provinces.  If 
they  had  reached  India  a year  sooner,  their  choice  of  a field  of  labor 
might  have  been  a very  different  one ; or,  if  a year  later,  they  would 
probably  have  found  the  ground  at  Lodiana  already  occupied,  and  that 
perhaps  by  some  educational  institution  from  which  the  Christian  re- 
ligion would  have  been  excluded.  They  also  recognized  with  thank- 
fulness the  favor  that  was  shown  to  them  in  the  eyes  of  some  of  the 
most  influential  persons  in  the  country ; so  that  although  they  had 
landed  at  Calcutta,  feeling  uncertain  what  their  reception  might  be, 
they  were  cordially  aided  in  their  work  by  those  who  were  in  posi- 
tions greatly  to  promote  or  to  prevent  its  success ; while  nothing  could 
exceed  the  friendly  interest  in  their  mission  which  was  manifested  by 
all  the  European  missionary  brethren  with  whom  they  became  ac- 
quainted. Thus,  having  favor  in  the  sight  of  God  and  his  people,  their 
missionary  field  was  chosen  and  their  plans  of  work  were  laid. 

How  often  do  we  see  that  the  Lord’s  thoughts  are  not  our  thoughts, 
neither  his  ways  our  ways ! Signally  was  this  shown  in  the  early  his- 
tory of  this  mission.  Only  one  of  the  first  company  of  missionaries 
was  permitted  to  see  this  carefully  and  well-chosen  field  of  labor ; two 
of  the  others  were  early  called  to  their  rest — Mrs.  Lowrie  and  Mr. 
Reed — both  by  consumption;  and  Mrs.  Reed  had  accompanied  her 
husband  on  the  voyage  homeward,  which  he  did  not  live  to  complete. 
The  remaining  member  of  this  company  reached  the  station  at  Lodiana 
in  November,  1834,  and  entered  on  his  duties ; but  a few  days  after- 
wards he  was  taken  with  dangerous  illness.  For  several  weeks  the 
mission  seemed  likely  to  become  extinct,  by  his  removal  from  the 
scenes  of  this  life ; and,  on  his  partial  recovery,  he  was  told  by  his  medi- 
cal attendants  that  he  must  not  attempt  to  remain  in  the  hot  climate 
of  India.  A year  longer,  however,  was  spent  by  him  in  the  charge  of 
a school,  preaching,  and  making  journeys  and  inquiries,  to  gain  infor- 
mation for  the  use  of  the  mission  and  the  Church  at  home ; thus  doing 
the  work  of  a pioneer.  In  January,  1836,  he  left  Lodiana,  and  Cal- 
cutta in  April,  on  a visit  to  this  country  for  health ; but  eventually 


the  hope  of  returning  to  the  mission  was,  for  the  same  reason,  reluc- 
tantly abandoned. 

In  the  mean  time,  the  Rev.  Messrs.  James  Wilson  and  John  New- 
ton, and  their  wives,  had  arrived  at  Lodiana  in  December,  1835,  and 
entered  upon  enlarged  labors  in  the  service  of  Christ.  Besides  the 
school  and  other  duties,  they  took  charge  of  a printing-press  in  1836, 
which  has  been  a valuable  auxiliary  in  the  missionary  work. 

The  third  company  of  missionaries,  the  Rev.  Messrs.  James  R.  Camp- 
bell and  James  McEwen,  and  Messrs.  Jesse  M.  Jamieson,  William  S. 
Rogers  and  Joseph  Porter,  and  their  wives,  reached  Calcutta  in  March, 
1836.  It  was  Mr.  Lowrie’s  privilege  to  welcome  these  brethren  on 
their  arrival,  and  to  aid  them  in  preparing  for  their  journey  to  the 
Upper  Provinces.  Their  meeting  was  of  deep  interest,  as  may  readily 
be  supposed,  especially  to  one  who  had  seen  so  severe  bereavements 
and  so  many  dark  hours  in  the  short  history  of  the  mission.  It  was 
now  apparent  that  these  afflictions  were  not  intended  to  discourage 
the  supporters  of  the  mission,  but  to  teach  them  their  dependence  on 
divine  grace  alone ; to  purify  their  motives ; to  chasten  and  strengthen 
their  zeal ; and  thus  at  the  latter  end  to  do  them  good,  so  that  by  their 
means  God  would  impart  the  greatest  blessings  to  those  who  were  sit- 
ting  in  darkness  and  the  shadow  of  death. 

The  brethren  of  this  new  reinforcement  soon  proceeded  on  their  jour- 
ney to  Lodiana,  but  Mr.  McEwen  was  led,  by  what  appeared  to  be  indi- 
cations of  the  will  of  Providence,  to  stop  at  Allahabad,  a large  city  at 
the  junction  of  the  Ganges  and  the  Jumna,  which  has  ever  since  been 
occupied  as  a missionary  station.  Mr.  McEwen’s  labors  were  crowned 
with  pleasing  success,  and  a church  was  formed  in  January,  1837,  with 
thirteen  members.  Besides  preaching,  he  gave  a part  of  his  time  to 
the  charge  of  schools,  in  which  he  was  greatly  assisted  by  his  equally 
devoted  wife ; but  they  were  not  permitted  to  continue  long  in  these 
encouraging  labors.  On  account  of  the  loss  of  health,  he  was  com- 
pelled to  leave  India  in  1838  ; and,  after  serving  the  cause  of  Christ 
as  a pastor,  in  the  State  of  New  York,  he  was  called  to  his  rest  in 
1845. 

On  the  arrival  of  the  other  members  of  this  third  company  at  the 
end  of  their  journey,  in  1836,  two  new  stations  were  formed.  One  of 


MISSIONS  IN 


these  was  at  Saharunpur,  130  miles  south-east  from  Lodiana ; the  other 
was  at  Sabathu,  110  miles  north-east  from  the  same  place,  in  the  lower 
ranges  of  the  Himalaya  Mountains,  at  an  elevation  of  about  4000 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  The  un-ordained  brethren  of  this 
company  were  graduates  of  colleges,  in  preparation  for  the  work  of 
the  ministry.  They  went  out  as  teachers,  but  with  the  expectation  of 
prosecuting  their  theological  studies,  and  they  were  afterwards  ordained 
to  the  sacred  office. 

A church  was  organized  at  Lodiana  in  1837  ; and  it  is  remarkable 
that  two  of  its  first  three  native  members  have  since  become  valuable 
laborers  in  the  missionary  work ; one  as  a minister  of  the  gospel,  and 
another  as  a teacher.  This  must  be  viewed  as  a signal  proof  of  God’s 
favor  towards  this  infant  church,  and  as  a happy  example  of  the  way 
in  which  the  gospel  is  to  be  more  and  more  extended  in  heathen  coun- 
tries. The  schools  at  Lodiana,  Saharunpur,  and  Sabathu,  were  vigor- 
ously carried  forward,  and  the  brethren  were  engaged  in  preaching, 
distributing  the  Sacred  Scriptures  and  religious  tracts,  making  jour- 
neys to  places  where  large  assemblages  of  natives  were  collected  on 
festival  occasions ; but  it  does  not  fall  within  the  plan  of  this  little 
work  to  give  a continuous  narrative  of  these  labors.  Little  more  will 
be  attempted  here  than  to  present  a chronological  outline  of  the  arri- 
vals of  the  missionaries,  with  some  of  the  leading  facts  in  their  work. 

The  fourth  company  of  missionaries,  consisting  of  the  Rev.  Messrs. 
Henry  R.  Wilson,  Jr.,  John  H.  Morrison,  and  Joseph  Caldwell,  Mr. 
James  Craig,  teacher,  and  Mr.  Reese  Morris,  printer,  and  their  wives, 
arrived  at  Calcutta  in  April,  1838.  There  they  met  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
McEwen,  on  their  return  homewards,  and  were  greatly  aided  by  them 
in  making  arrangements  for  their  journey.  One  of  their  number, 
however,  had  already  reached  the  last  stage  of  her  pilgrimage  ; Mrs. 
Morrison  was  taken  to  her  rest  before  leaving  Calcutta,  after  a brief 
illness  of  cholera.  Her  afflicted  companions  proceeded  to  their  several 
stations : Mr.  Morrison  to  Allahabad,  to  join  the"  Rev.  James  Wilson, 
who  had  taken  charge  of  the  station  on  Mr.  McEwen’s  removal ; Mr. 
Morris  to  Lodiana;  and  Messrs.  Caldwell  and  Craig  to  Saharunpur. 
Mr.  H.  R.  Wilson,  while  proceeding  to  the  station  at  Lodiana,  was  led 
by  Providence  to  stop  at  Futtehgurh,  on  the  Ganges,  two  hundred 


NORTH  INDIA.  41 


miles  above  Allahabad,  a town  which  had  been  pointed  out  by  some 
of  the  earlier  brethren  as  eligible  for  a missionary  station.  Here,  with 
an  interesting  family  of  orphan  children,  a part  of  whom  were  placed 
under  his  care  by  a pious  English  physician,  and  assisted  by  Copeenath 
Nundy,  the  teacher  previously  employed  in  their  instruction,  Mr.  Wil- 
son began  important  labors,  which  have  been  steadily  prosecuted  ever 
since,  with  evident  tokens  of  the  favor  of  Heaven. 

In  February,  1839,  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Joseph  Warren,  John  E.  Free- 
man, and  James  L.  Scott,  and  their  wives,  arrived  at  Calcutta,  and 
became  connected,  the  first  two  with  Allahabad,  and  the  last  with 
Futtehgurh.  A printing-press  was  sent  out  with  Mr.  Warren,  which, 
under  his  efficient  superintendence,  became  an  invaluable  means  of 
promoting  the  influence  of  the  mission.  In  November  of  this  year, 
Mrs.  Caldwell,  at  Saharunpur,  was  called  to  her  rest. 

In  December  of  the  next  year,  the  Rev.  Messrs.  John  C.  Rankin 
and  William  H.  McAuley,  and  their  wives ; the  Rev.  Joseph  Owen 
and  Miss  Jane  Yanderveer,  teacher,  arrived  at  Calcutta.  Mr.  Owen 
joined  the  Allahabad  Mission,  and  the  rest  proceeded  to  Futtehgurh. 
In  this  year,  1840,  the  work  of  translating  the  Sacred  Scriptures 
and  preparing  other  religious  books  and  tracts,  began  to  be  reported 
as  occupying  much  of  the  time  of  some  of  the  missionaries.  One  of 
these  works  was  a translation  of  the  Gospel  of  J olm  from  the  original 
Greek  into  Punjabi,  the  language  of  the  Sikhs  ; another  was  the  Con- 
fession of  Faith  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  into  Hindustani,  with  the 
Scripture  references  at  the  bottom  of  the  page. 

In  the  year  1841,  churches  were  organized  at  Saharunpur  and  Fut- 
tehgurh, and  twenty-seven  native  members  were  reported  at  all  the 
stations. 

The  Rev.  Messrs.  Levi  Janvier  and  John  Wray,  and  their  wives, 
reached  India  in  January,  1842,  and  were  stationed— the  former  at 
Lodiana,  and  the  latter  at  Allahabad.  Messrs.  Morrison  and  Cald- 
well were  married.  Mrs.  Porter  was  called  this  year  to  her  rest. 
Dr.  Willis  Green  reached  India  in  November;  spent  a few  months 
at  Lodiana ; and  returned  home,  the  climate  not  suiting  his  health. 
Churches  were  organized  at  Saharunpur  and  Futtehgurh,  and  the 
year  was  further  signalized  by  the  organization  of  three  Presbyte- 


MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


42 


ries  under  the  instructions  of  the  General  Assembly,  composed  of  the 
ministers  in  each  mission,  and  taking  their  names,  like  the  missions,  from 
the  leading  city,  or  the  station  first  occupied,  in  the  bounds  of  each : 
Lodiana,  Furrukhabad,  and  Allahabad.  The  brethren  at  Saharunpur 
being  ecclesiastically  related  to  the  General  Synod  of  the  Reformed 
Presbyterian  Church,  were  constituted  by  their  Synod  into  a separate 
Presbytery.  Their  relations  to  the  Board  as  missionaries  are  the  same 
as  those  of  the  other  brethren,  and  the  intercourse  between  them  lias 
been  mutually  pleasant  and  beneficial.  A part  of  their  support  has 
always  been  furnished  by  churches  of  the  Reformed  Synod. 

The  year  1843  was  marked  by  the  arrival  in  India  of  the  Rev.  John 
J.  Walsh  and  his  wife,  who  were  connected  with  the  Furrukhabad  mis- 
sion ; the  death  of  the  second  Mrs.  Morrison  ; the  return  to  this  coun- 
try of  Mr.  Rogers  and  family,  on  account  of  Mrs.  Rogers’  ill  health ; 
and  of  Mr.  Morrison  also  for  health ; the  forming  of  a new  station 
at  Mynpurie,  forty  miles  west  of  Futtehgurh ; the  licensure  of  the 
native  assistants,  Golok  Nath  and  Gopeenath  Nundy,  by  the  Presby- 
teries of  Lodiana  and  Furrukhabad  ; and  the  steady  advance  of  the 
missionary  work.  The  church  members  reported  at  Allahabad  in  Jan- 
uary were  nine  Americans,  three  Europeans,  eight  East  Indians,  and 
eleven  natives ; in  all  thirty-one. 

In  1844,  Mr.  Owen  was  married.  Gopeenath  Nundy  was  ordained. 
Parts  of  the  Bible,  in  a revised  translation,  were  printed  at  Lodiana 
in  Hindustani.  A translation  of  the  Koran  into  the  same  language, 
by  a Maulavi,  with  an  Introduction  and  Notes,  refuting  its  errors, 
by  the  Rev.  J.  Wilson,  was  published  at  Allahabad,  marking  quite  a 
new  era  in  Mohammedan  literature.  A larger  number  of  tracts  and 
books  were  distributed  in  the  Lodiana  Mission  than  during  any  former 
year,  and  all  the  branches  of  missionary  labor  were  faithfully  carried 
forward.  The  number  of  church  members  reported  at  Futtehgurh 
this  year  was  twenty-seven,  of  whom  sixteen  were  natives. 

The  next  year  witnessed  the  death  of  Mr.  Craig  at  Saharunpur,  and 
of  Mrs.  Jamieson  at  Sabathu  ; the  return  to  this  country  of  Mr.  Mor- 
ris on  account  of  health  : the  destruction  by  fire  of  the  printing-press, 
book-depository,  &c.,  at  Lodiana,  causing  the  loss  of  about  $10,000 
worth  of  property,  including  upwards  of  90,000  copies  of  parts  of  the 


Holy  Scriptures  and  of  tracts.  In  general,  the  labors  of  the  mission- 
aries were  continued  without  change.  In  November  of  this  year,  the 
first  meeting  of  the  Synod  of  North  India  was  held  at  Futtehgurh. 
Important  questions,  concerning  the  kingdom  of  Christ  in  India,  re- 
ceived the  earnest  consideration  of  its  Inembers. 

In  1846,  Mr.  Jamieson  visited  this  country,  to  provide  for  the  edu- 
cation of  his  motherless  children ; Mr.  H.  R.  Wilson  and  family  also 
returned,  on  account  of  Mrs.  Wilson’s  health;  and  Miss  Yanderveer 
came  home  also  on  account  of  impaired  health.  Mr.  Morrison  having 
regained  his  health,  returned  to  India  with  his  wife ; Mr.  Rudolph,  a 
German  teacher,  and  his  wife,  who  had  spent  some  years  in  India,  be- 
came connected  with  the  Lodiana  Mission,  and  Mr.  Rudolph  was  licensed 
to  preach  the  gospel.  A new  station  was  formed  at  Agra ; and  a number 
of  the  members  of  the  church  at  Allahabad  having  removed  to  that  city 
upon  the  transfer  of  the  government  offices,  they  were  reorganized  as  a 
church,  with  other  members,  making  in  all  fifteen,  under  the  minis- 
terial charge  of  the  missionaries.  At  Futtehgurh,  the  number  of 
church  members  reported  was  thirty-four.  At  Allahabad,  a church 
building,  78  feet  by  45,  was  erected  ; while,  to  the  communion  of  the 
church  itself,  it  was  stated  that  from  its  commencement  seventy-four 
persons  had  been  admitted,  fifty-one  of  whom  were  received  on  the  pro- 
fession of  their  faith.  The  government  college  at  Allahabad  was  trans- 
ferred to  the  mission,  and  the  Christian  religion  and  books  became  a 
part  of  the  daily  studies  of  the  scholars. 

Early  in  1847,  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Augustus  H.  Seeley  and  David  Ir- 
ving and  their  wives,  and  Mr.  Robert  M.  Munnis,  licentiate  preacher, 
arrived  at  Calcutta,  on  their  way  to  the  Furrukhabad  Mission.  Mr. 
Jamieson,  on  his  return  to  his  field  of  labor,  with  his  wife,  reached  Cal- 
cutta in  November.  Mr.  Campbell  with  his  family  arrived  in  this 
country  on  a visit,  on  account  of  his  wife’s  health.  Mr.  Rudolph  and 
Golok  Nath  were  ordained  as  Evangelists  by  the  Presbytery  of  Lodi- 
ana, and  Mr.  Munnis,  by  the  Presbytery  of  Furrukhabad.  A new  sta- 
tion was  formed  at  Jalandar,  in  the  Punjab,  about  thirty  miles  west  of 
Lodiana,  which  was  occupied  by  the  Rev.  Golok  Nath  and  a native 
teacher.  Churches  were  organized  at  Sabathu  and  Jalandar.  Some 
new  members  were  admitted  to  most  of  the  churches ; and  the  number 


MISSIONS  IN  NORTH  INDIA. 


reported  from  all  the  stations,  except  Agra  and  Saharunpur,  was  o ne 
hundred  and  seven. 

In  January,  1848,  the  Rev.  A.  Alexander  Hodge  and  his  wife,  and 
the  Rev.  Charles  W.  Forman,  arrived  in  India.  The  former  j oined 
the  Allahabad,  and  the  latter  the  Lodiana  Mission.  In  November, 
Mr.  Campbell  and  his  wife  reached  Calcutta,  on  their  return  to  Saha- 
runpur, accompanied  by  the  Rev.  John  S.  Woodside  and  his  wife,  of 
the  Reformed  Presbyterian  Church,  destined  to  the  same  station.  Mr. 
Julius  F.  Ullman,  a German  teacher,  who  had  lived  for  some  years  in 
India,  became  connected  with  the  Furrukhabad  Mission,  and  was 
licensed  to  preach  the  gospel  by  the  Presbytery.  Mr.  Porter  returned 
to  this  country  on  a visit  with  his  motherless  children,  and  Mr.  Rankin 
and  his  family  came  home  on  account  of  his  ill  health.  Mrs.  Scott 
was  called  to  her  rest  while  on  her  return  to  this  country  for  her  health. 
A new  station  was  formed  at  Ambala,  a city  almost  equally  distant 
from  Lodiana,  Saharunpur,  and  Sabathu,  which  was  occupied  by  Mr. 
Jamieson  and  a native  catechist.  Some  new  members  were  admitted 
to  the  churches,  and  a few  were  suspended  from  church  privileges. 
The  second  meeting  of  the  Synod  of  North  India  was  held  at  Agra,  in 
December  of  this  year.  The  Minutes  of  this  meeting,  and  also  of  the 
first  meeting,  are  published  in  the  Foreign  Missionary  Chronicle  of 
November,  1849.  They  will  be  read  in  future  ages,  as  well  as  at  the 
present  time,  with  deep  interest. 

In  the  next  year,  Mr.  Porter  returned,  with  his  wife,  to  his  field  of 
labor  ; Mrs.  Rudolph  and  Mrs.  Freeman  were  taken  to  their  rest ; and 
Messrs,  Irving  and  Wray  and  their  families  returned  to  this  country  on 
accouut  of  health.  Mr.  Ullman  received  ordination  from  the  Presby- 
tery of  Furrukhabad,  and  John  Hari,  a native  catechist,  was  licensed 
to  preach  the  gospel  by  the  Presbytery  of  Allahabad.  A new  station 
was  formed  at  Labor,  the  chief  city  of  the  Punjab,  which  was  occu- 
pied by  Messrs.  Newton  and  Forman.  A church  was  organized  at 
Ambala,  and  a special  work  of  grace  was  manifested  at  Futtehgurh, 
as  the  result  of  which  thirty-three  members  were  admitted  to  the  com- 
munion of  the  church.  The  whole  number  of  church  members  reported 
this  year  was  167. 

The  year  1850  was  marked  by  the  arrival  in  India  of  the  Rev. 


43 


James  H.  Orbison,  to  join  the  Lodiana  Mission ; the  Rev.  Messrs. 
David  E.  Campbell  and  Robert  S.  Fullerton  and  their  wives,  to  join 
the  Furrukhabad  Mission ; and  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Lawrence  G.  Hay 
and  Horatio  W.  Shaw  and  their  wives,  to  be  connected  with  the  Alla- 
habad Mission ; and  by  the  return  to  this  country  of  Mr.  Hodge  and 
his  wife,  on  account  of  her  health,  and  of  Mr.  Freeman,  whose  health 
had  also  become  impaired.  The  number  of  church  members  reported 
this  year  was  209. 

Messrs.  J.  Wilson  and  W.  H.  McAuley  and  their  families  came 
home  in  1851,  on  account  of  health.  Mr.  Freeman,  with  his  wife, 
returned  to  his  field  of  labor,  and  Messrs.  Rudolph  and  Ullman 
were  married.  The  number  of  church  members  reported  this  year 
was  231. 

In  1852,  Mr.  Scott  made  a visit  to  this  country  on  account  of  his 
children,  and  Mr.  Newton  and  his  family  came  home  on  account  of 
his  health.  The  Rev.  Robert  E.  Williams  embarked  for  India,  and 
arrived  at  Agra  early  in  the  following  year.  Schools  were  now  estab- 
lished at  this  city  for  the  education  of  the  children  of  persons  of 
mixed  parentage,  European  and  native,  who  are  commonly  called 
East  Indians,  a-  class  of  growing  numbers,  intelligence,  and  influ- 
ence. The  buildings  required  for  their  use  were  purchased,  with 
the  aid  of  very  handsome  donations  from  the  late  lamented  Governor 
of  the  North-western  Provinces,  the  Hon.  J.  Thomason,  and  other 
English  friends.*  Tljp  members  of  the  church,  according  to  the  report 
of  this  year,  were  255. 

In  1853,  Mr.  Scott  with  his  wife  returned  to  India ; Mr.  Orbison 
was  married ; and  Mrs.  Seeley  and  Mr.  Porter  were  called  to  their 


* One  feature  of  the  missionary  cause  in  India  should  be  mentioned  as  truly  gratify- 
ing. From  the  beginning  our  missionary  friends  have  enjoyed  the  confidence  of  many 
of  the  English  residents  in  that  country — civilians,  officers  in  the  army,  and  others. 
They  have  seen  our  brethren  at  their  stations,  engaged  in  their  daily  labors.  With  the 
best  knowledge  of  the  work  in  progress,  they  have  considered  it  their  privilege  to  pro- 
mote it  by  their  sympathy,  influence,  and  very  liberal  gifts.  They  have  done  this  as  a 
means  of  building  up  the  kingdom  of  our  blessed  Lord;  and  thus  have  they  greatly 
encouraged  our  missionary  brethren,  and  gratified  the  friends  of  missions  in  this  country. 
Our  common  Saviour  will  reward  them  richly  for  their  cordial  and  efficient  coopera- 
tion with  his  servants  in  these  missions. 


44  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


rest.  The  work  of  the  missions  continued  to  be  carried  forward  with 
fidelity  and  zeal. 

The  preceding  sketch  conveys  a very  inadequate  view  of  the  work 
of  evangelization  which  our  brethren  in  India  have  been  permitted 
already  to  accomplish.  Besides  preaching  statedly  at  their  various 
stations,  they  are  accustomed  during  the  cold  months  of  each  year  to 
make  journeys  into  parts  of  the  country  not  yet  occupied,  in  order  to 
make  known  the  way  of  life  by  public  discourses,  conversation,  and 
the  distribution  of  the  Scriptures  and  other  Christian  books.  To 
thousands  of  towns  and  villages  has  the  gospel  been  published  on  these 
tours.  They  are  accustomed  also  to  attend  the  Melas  held  at  particu- 
lar times  and  places.  These  are  assemblages  of  the  natives  for  reli- 
gious ceremonies,  but  are  attended  by  many  for  purposes  of  trade  or 
amusement — so  that  they  may  be  regarded  as  a kind  of  Fair.  They 
are  held  at  places  accounted  holy,  such  as  Hardwar,  where  the  Ganges 
enters  the  plains,  and  Allahabad,  where  the  Ganges,  the  Jumna,  and 
according  to  the  native  tradition  a third  river,  invisible,  unite  their 
streams.  Immense  crowds,  amounting  to  hundreds  of  thousands,  in- 
cluding many  pilgrims  and  visitors  from  the  most  distant  parts  of  the 
land,  attend  the  more  celebrated  of  these  Melas  ; and  there  are  nume- 
rous others  of  less  note,  attended  by  people  from  the  neighboring  towns 
and  villages.  They  afford  opportunities  for  widely  disseminating  the 
knowledge  of  the  gospel.  The  good  influence  exerted  in  this  way  will 
not  be  known  until  the  great  day  reveals  it,  but  sometimes  it  is  signally 
displayed.  An  aged  Brahman  had  made  a pilgrimage  from  Jubbel- 
pore  to  attend  the  Mela  at  Allahabad,  a journey  of  several  hundred 
miles,  to  wash  away  his  sins  in  the  Ganges.  There  he  heard  a dis- 
course by  one  of  the  missionaries,  which  shook  his  faith  in  Hinduism. 
He  returned  home  without  having  had  an  interview  with  the  mission- 
ary, and  was  led  by  the  persuasion  of  a Qazi  to  study  the  Koran  ; but 
he  found  in  Mohammedanism  no  rest  for  his  troubled  mind.  Having 
by  some  means  obtained  a portion  of  the  Scriptures,  he  carefully 
studied  its  lessons,  and  taught  them  to  his  only  daughter.  At  this 
point,  an  English  officer  became  acquainted  with  him,  and  found  that 
he  had  renounced  his  own  religion,  and  was  sincerely  seeking  a know- 


ledge of  the  Christian  faith  in  the  face  of  many  difficulties.  A Hindi 
Bible  for  him  was  requested  from  one  of  the  missionaries  at  Agra,  and 
thus  his  history  became  known  to  our  brethren. 

Another  means  of  promoting  a knowledge  of  the  Christian  religion 
has  been  afforded  by  the  Press.  Numerous  tracts  and  catechisms,  in 
various  Hindu  dialects,  and  some  larger  works,  have  been  published. 
The  Way  of  Life,  by  Dr.  Hodge,  translated  into  Hindustani ; another 
work  with  a similar  title  by  a German  missionary  ; a translation  of  the 
Koran  into  Hindustani,  with  notes  in  refutation  of  its  errors ; the 
Westminster  Confession  of  Faith;  a volume  of  Hymns;  revised  edi- 
tions of  the  Scriptures,  in  whole  or  in  part ; a translation  of  the  books 
of  Genesis,  Exodus,  chapters  i.-xx.,  and  Psalms,  and  most  of  the  New 
Testameut,  into  Punjabi,  by  Messrs.  Newton  and  Janvier ; are  among 
the  larger  works  issued  by  the  press.  The  whole  amount  of  print- 
ing at  Lodiana  and  Allahabad  from  the  beginning  is  over  one  hun- 
dred millions  of  pages,  of  which  the  sacred  writings  form  a large 
portion.  By  means  of  these  Christian  books  a large  amount  of  truth, 
subversive  of  idolatry  and  Mohammedanism,  and  setting  forth  the  true 
religion,  has  been  widely  diffused.  Some  striking  examples  of  good 
which  has  been  done  in  this  way,  sometimes  in  places  far  remote  from 
the  stations  of  our  brethren,  have  been  reported  in  their  letters. 

Still  another  important  agency  has  been  the  schools  of  the  Missions. 
These  have  been  supported  from  the  beginning,  it  having  been  consi- 
dered from  the  commencement  of  the  work  an  object  of  the  greatest 
importance  to  train  up  a native  ministry  ; and  the  number  of  scholars 
has  gradually  increased  until,  as  stated  in  the  Report  of  this  year, 
1854,  about  two  thousand  nine  hundred  of  the  native  youth  are 
now  under  instruction.  A few  of  the  scholars  are  in  elementary 
schools,  but  most  of  them  are  in  schools  of  a higher  grade ; and  all  of 
them  have  been  brought  in  greater  or  less  degree  under  the  influence 
of  Christian  instruction  and  example.  A large  proportion  of  them 
have  become  convinced  of  the  folly,  and  in  some  measure  of  the  sin,  of 
idolatry.  Many  of  them  are  prepared  to  acknowledge  that  Christianity 
is  the  true  religion  ; some  of  them  have  become  the  professed  followers 
of  our  Lord,  and  a few  are  laboring  in  various  ways — one  as  an  ordained 
minister,  others  as  teachers,  catechists,  and  Scripture-readers — to  bring 


MISSIONS  IN  NORTH  INDIA.  45 


their  countrymen  to  the  knowledge  of  Jesus  Christ  as  the  Saviour  of 
sinners. 

The  preaching  of  the  gospel  in  these  missions  has  not  been  in  vain, 
as  the  preceding  statements  have  shown.  It  is  with  sincere  thanks- 
giving that  we  can  refer  to  still  another  and  more  impressive  proof  of 
the  blessing  of  God  on  the  labors  of  his  servants, — the  Christian  life 
and  the  dying  testimony  of  some  of  the  converts  to  the  power  of 
divine  grace.  An  affecting  and  beautiful  little  memoir  was  published 
by  Mr.  Warren,  a few  years  ago,  of  Jatni,  a member  of  the  church  at 
Allahabad.  She  was  the  daughter  of  a Brahman,  but  she  became  a 
child  of  God.  In  all  the  relations  and  events  of  life,  her  deportment 
was  exemplary.  And  when  called  at  length  to  pass  over  Jordan,  she 
was  supported  by  a good  hope  through  grace.  Mr.  Warren,  with  ten- 
der caution,  had  apprised  her  of  the  probable  termination  of  her  disease ; 
and  he  adds,  “ I was  delighted  to  find  that  she  had  thought  of  it,  and 
had  come  to  feel  willing  that  God  should  do  with  her,  as  to  life,  just  as 
he  pleased.  I questioned  her  closely,  and  set  death  and  the  judgment 
before  her  plainly ; but  her  nerves  were  firm,  her  eye  clear,  and  her 
voice  calm  and  steady : ‘ I know  Christ,  and  can  fully  and  completely 
trust  him  in  all  things.  He  keeps  my  mind  in  perfect  peace.’  I saw 
her  often,  and  always  found  her  the  same.”  She  was  enabled  to  resign 


her  soul,  her  husband  and  her  child  to  the  care  of  her  Father  in 
heaven,  and  at  the  early  age  of  twenty-two,  she  departed  joyfully  to  be 
with  Christ.  Another  example  hardly  less  striking  was  presented  in 
the  Christian  death  of  a native  catechist  at  Saharunpur.  His  mission- 
ary friend  Mr.  Campbell,  who  had  frequent  and  most  pleasing  inter- 
views with  him  on  his  death-bed,  gives  a very  interesting  account  of 
his  religious  views  and  hopes : “ I asked  him,  if  he  was  afraid  to  die  ? 
‘ No,  Sir,’  he  said,  ‘ I am  not  now  afraid.  ...  I am  now  fully  recon- 
ciled to  the  will  of  God.  I do  not  wish  to  live  longer  in  this  sinful 
world.’  On  being  asked  where  his  hopes  for  salvation  were  placed,  he 
replied  emphatically,  ‘ On  Christ  alone  : he  is  the  only  Saviour,  and  I 
know  he  will  not  disappoint  my  hopes ;’  and  then,  bursting  into  tears, 
he  said,  ‘ 0 Sir,  how  much  I owe  to  you!  You  are  the  means  of  lead- 
ing me  to  Christ,  and  of  instructing  me  and  saving  my  soul.’  This 
was  so  much  more  than  I had  expected,  it  was  too  much  for  me,  and 
we  both  wept  together.  At  that  moment  I thought  that  this  was 
more  than  enough  to  compensate  me  for  all  the  little  trials  I have  ever 
been  called  to  endure  as  a missionary.  I could  have  changed  places 
with  dear  Samuel,  to  enjoy  his  happiness  and  assurance  of  hope.” 
Examples  like  these  are  precious  seals  of  the  favor  of  Heaven  towards 
the  missionary  work. 


V. 

MISSION  IN  SIAM. 

“Slirtr  kings  shall  be  th»  nursing  fathers." 


The  missionary  field  in  Siam  is  not  a large  one,  viewed  either  as  to 
the  extent  of  its  territory  or  the  number  of  its  inhabitants ; yet,  as 
will  appear  in  the  sequel,  it  is  one  of  more  than  ordinary  interest. 

Siam  is  a long,  narrow  country,  lying  between  Burmah  and  Cochin- 
China,  and  extending  from  the  Gulf  of  Siam  to  the  borders  of  China. 
It  is  watered  by  several  rivers  and  by  numerous  canals ; and  as  the 
soil  is  generally  quite  fertile,  it  is  capable  of  supporting  a large  popu- 
lation. Having  been  distracted  by  wars,  however,  until  within  com- 
paratively a modern  period,  the  actual  number  of  inhabitants  is  esti- 
mated at  not  more  than  from  3,000,000  to  5,000,000.  Of  these  some 
hundred  thousands  are  Chinese,  and  there  are  many  Peguans,  Burmese, 
Shans,  &c.  This  diversity  among  the  inhabitants  imparts  the  greater 
interest  to  Siam  as  a sphere  of  missionary  labor.  Some  races  may  be 
reached  here  who  cannot  be  visited  in  their  own  lands.  Numerous 
Chinese,  for  instance,  from  the  island  of  Hainan  are  now  living  in 
Bangkok,  who  keep  up  a constant  intercourse  with  their  own  country ; 
and  through  whom  a Christian  influence  might  readily  be  exerted  on 
the  1,500,000  inhabitants  of  that  island. 

In  Siam  the  inhabitants  live  chiefly  on  the  banks  of  rivers  and 
canals,— a circumstance  worthy  of  being  noted,  as  it  renders  them 
easily  accessible  by  missionaries  in  boats — the  common  mode  of  travel- 
ling. The  principal  city  is  Bangkok,  of  which  the  population  is  esti- 
mated at  300,000 ; it  is  situated  on  the  Meinam,  about  twenty-five 


miles  from  its  mouth.  The  people  of  this  country  are  hardly  inferior 
in  civilization  to  other  nations  of  South-eastern  Asia.  They  carry  on 
various  kinds  of  industrial  occupation.  Many  are  able  to  read,  and 
schools  are  commonly  connected  with  the  wats,  or  places  devoted  to 
temples  and  idolatrous  worship,  where  education  is  given  without 
charge  by  some  of  the  priests ; yet  the  knowledge  thus  acquired  by  the 
youth  is  little  more  than  that  of  the  simplest  kind. 

The  government  of  this  country  is  a despotism.  The  king  is  chosen, 
however,  on  some  basis  of  hereditary  descent,  by  the  principal  nobles, 
which  must  give  them  influence  in  the  administration  of  public  affairs. 
In  no  other  country  in  the  East,  and  probably  in  no  country  in 
any  part  of  the  world,  is  the  influence  of  the  king  more  controlling 
over  all  the  opinions  and  conduct  of  his  subjects ; the  servility  of  all 
classes  is  most  abject,  and  is  fitly  shown  by  the  prostration,  with  the 
face  to  the  ground,  of  even  the  chief  men  when  they  appear  in  the 
royal  presence. 

The  religion  of  the  Siamese  is  Buddhism,  which  may  be  character- 
ized as  a kind  of  atheistical  idolatry  ; for  Budh,  in  his  most  common 
form,  Guadama,  is  not  supposed  to  take  any  concern  in  the  affairs  of 
men.  Some  of  the  practical  precepts  of  Buddhism  are  good, — murder, 
theft,  adultery,  falsehood,  intoxicating  drinks  are  prohibited ; yet  it 
sanctions  polygamy,  and  the  morals  of  its  votaries  are  the  morals  of 
the  heathen  everywhere.  As  a religion  it  makes  no  provision  for  the 


MISSION  IN  SIAM.  47 


pardon  of  sin,  nor  for  the  purifying  of  a depraved  nature  ; and  it 
yields  neither  support  to  the  afflicted,  nor  hope  to  the  dyiug.  Its  high- 
est doctrine  teaches  the  perpetual  transmigration  of  the  soul,  until  at 
length  it  becomes  annihilated,— that  is,  swallowed  up  in  the  being  of 
the  apathetic  Budh.  This  religion  prevails  more  widely  than  any 
other,  having  under  various  forms  its  votaries  in  India,  (which  many 
consider  the  original  seat  of  Budhism,)  Burmah,  the  Chinese  Archi- 
pelago, Cochin-China,  China  proper,  Chinese  Tartary,  and  Thibet.  It 
is  one  of  the  reasons  for  regarding  Siam  with  special  interest  as  a mis- 
sionary field,  that  it  is  the  head-quarters  of  this  widely-spread  system 
of  false  religion,  so  far  as  this  bad  preeminence  can  be  assigned  to  any 
country.  It  is  a religion  held  here  in  great  honor.  The  king  is  its 
subject ; the  revenues  of  the  kingdom  are  to  a large  extent  devoted  to 
the  wats,  the  support  of  priests,  processions  in  honor  of  Guadama,  and 
other  religious  ceremonies.  If  Budh  were  dethroned  in  this  country, 
his  downfall  would  doubtless  be  felt  in  other  parts  of  Asia. 

The  mission  established  by  the  Board  in  Siam  was  resolved  upon  in 
1839.  It  was  formed  at  first  with  reference  to  the  Chinese  rather  than 
to  the  Siamese.  The  door  into  China  was  not  then  open,  and  Mission- 
ary Societies  adopted  the  policy  of  supporting  stations  among  the 
large  numbers  of  Chinese  emigrants  who  were  found  in  the  neighboring 
countries.  The  Rev.  Robert  W.  Orr,  one  of  the  first  missionaries  to 
the  Chinese,  whose  station  was  at  Singapore,  made  a visit  to  Siam  in 
the  autumn  of  1838 ; and  upon  his  favorable  report  it  was  deemed 
expedient  to  form  a branch  of  the  Chinese  mission  at  Bangkok,  and 
also  a mission  to  the  Siamese  at  the  same  place.  The  Rev.  William 
P.  Buell  and  his  wife,  appointed  to  the  latter  mission,  arrived  at 
Bangkok  in  August,  1840.  A physician  and  his  wife  were  appointed 
to  this  field  of  labor  in  1841,  and  a minister  and  his  wife  in  1843. 
They  were  led,  however,  to  proceed  to  China  instead  of  Siam,  so  that 
Mr.  Buell  was  not  joined  by  any  associate,  After  learning  the  lan- 
guage, he  was  able  to  preach  the  gospel  and  distribute  the  Holy 
Scriptures  and  other  religious  books,  explaining  them  to  the  people. 
He  was  encouraged  in  his  work ; but  in  1844  he  was  compelled  to 
return  to  this  country  by  the  state  of  his  wife’s  health. 

In  March,  1847,  the  Rev.  Stephen  Mattoon  and  his  wife,  and  Samuel 


R.  House,  M.  D.,  licentiate  preacher,  arrived  at  Bangkok ; and  in 
April,  1849,  they  were  joined  by  the  Rev.  Stephen  Bush  and  his  wife. 
These  brethren  found  ample  employment  in  preaching  and  distributing 
the  Scriptures  and  religious  tracts.  The  medical  labors  of  Dr.  House 
were  of  the  greatest  benefit  to  large  numbers  of  patients ; while  they 
brought  many  persons  within  the  reach  of  the  gospel,  whose  attention 
could  not  otherwise  have  been  gained ; and  they  also  tended  to  concili- 
ate the  confidence  and  good-will  of  persons  of  all  classes  towards  the 
missionaries. 

The  year  1850  was  marked  by  vigorous  labors  in  preaching  and 
tract  distribution  in  Bangkok  ; by  missionary  tours  to  several  distant 
parts  of  the  country,  which  were  made  without  hinderance,  and  afforded 
many  opportunities  of  publishing  the  gospel ; by  the  printing  at  the 
press  of  another  mission  in  Bangkok  of  422,000  pages  of  books  of 
Scripture  history ; and  by  faithful  and  successful  medico-missionary 
practice.  This  year  was  also  marked  by  a singular  exigency  in  the 
history  of  the  mission,  which  for  months  threatened  its  existence. 

The  missionaries  had  lived  in  houses  formerly  occupied  by  missionaries 
of  the  American  Board.  On  relinquishing  Siam  as  a field  of  labor, 
the  American  Board  transferred  these  houses  to  the  American  Asso- 
ciation, and  it  became  necessary  for  the  brethren  to  seek  other  places 
of  abode.  After  long  search  and  many  disappointments,  they  found  it 
impossible  either  to  purchase  or  rent  new  quarters.  The  increasing 
bigotry  of  the  King  was  the  obstacle  in  their  way.  He  did  not  openly 
oppose  their  wishes,  but  it  was  soon  understood  among  his  abject  peo- 
ple that  he  was  unfriendly  to  foreign  teachers ; and  no  man  was  willing 
to  sell  or  lease  real  estate  to  those  who  at  any  hour  might  be  ordered 
out  of  the  kingdom.  The  strange  issue  was  apparently  reached,  that 
Christian  missionaries  must  withdraw  from  a heathen  land,  where  their 
life  and  liberty  were  still  safe,  and  where  their  labors  might  be  carried 
forward  in  many  ways,  solely  for  the  want  of  houses  in  which  to  live ! 
The  question  had  been  viewed  in  every  aspect ; referred  home  to  the 
Executive  Committee  ; reconsidered  after  obtaining  the  sanction  of  the 
Committee,  given  fully,  but  with  deep  regret,  to  their  removal  to  some 
new  field  of  labor — and  still  the  necessity  for  this  removal  appeared  to 
be  unavoidable. 


48  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


Towards  the  end  of  the  year  matters  grew  worse.  The  teachers  of 
the  missionaries  were  arrested  and  thrown  into  prison,  their  Siamese 
servants  left  them  or  were  taken  away,  and  none  of  the  people  dared 
to  hold  intercourse  with  them  on  religious  subjects.  In  the  meantime 
prayer  was  offered  without  ceasing  on  their  behalf,  and  in  answer  to 
the  requests  of  his  people,  God  interposed  for  the  help  of  his  servants, 
— but  in  a way  not  expected  by  them.  'The  King  was  attacked  with 
disease  in  January,  1851  ; and,  though  he  had  the  prospect  of  many 
years  of  life,  he  was  cut  down  by  death  in  April. 

His  successor,  the  present  king,  had  much  intercourse  with  the  mis- 
sionaries before  his  accession  to  the  throne,  and  he  has  since  shown 
himself  to  be  their  friend.  The  difficulty  about  a site  for  mission 
premises  was  soon  removed ; suitable  houses  have  been  erected,  and 
the  work  of  the  mission  can  now  be  prosecuted  with  greater  freedom 
than  at  any  former  period. 

The  little  company  of  missionaries  have  since  been  called  to  meet 
with  trials  of  a different  kind — to  see  their  number  diminished,  instead 
of  being  increased.  Mrs.  Bush  was  removed  by  death  in  July,  1851. 
Her  last  days  were  full  of  Christian  peace  and  joy,  and  her  associates 
could  say,  that  “ in  the  full  possession  of  all  her  faculties,  without  one 
cloud  to  separate  between  her  and  a present  Saviour,  she  went  down 
into  the  Jordan  of  death,  singing  Hallelujah,  in  the  triumph  of  victory. 
The  Siamese  have  lost  in  her  a faithful,  praying  friend  ; the  mission,  an 
exemplary  fellow-laborer  ; and  her  bereaved  husband,  an  affectionate 
and  beloved  companion.”  The  health  of  Mr.  Bush  afterwards  gave 
way,  and  it  became  necessary  for  him  to  return  to  this  country,  in 
1853,  for  its  recovery.  He  has  not  yet  become  sufficiently  restored  to 
return  to  his  field  of  labor. 

With  the  single  exception  of  the  embarrassment  growing  out  of 
their  small  number,  the  missionaries  have  reason  to  be  much  encour- 
aged in  their  work  and  its  prospects.  They  are  permitted  to  preach 
the  gospel  in  stated  services  and  by  the  way-side;  and  the  Word  has 
not  been  preached  in  vain.  Besides  the  testimony  thereby  held  forth 
for  God  and  against  idols,  and  the  secret  convictions  and  impressions 
of  many  hearers,  which  may  yet  result  in  the  open  confession  of  Christ 
before  men,  two  hopeful  converts  have  been  admitted  to  the  church. 


They  are  both  Chinese,  and  one  of  them  is  a native  of  Hainan.  Their 
walk  and  conversation  are  exemplary,  and  both  of  them  are  engaged 
in  efforts  to  make  the  gospel  known  unto  their  own  people.  Some 
progress  has  been  made  in  giving  the  Scriptures  to  the  Siamese  in 
their  own  tongue.  The  New  Testament  and  the  books  of  Genesis  and 
Exodus  have  been  translated  by  the  missionaries  of  other  Boards ; but 
the  translation  will  require  revision,  and  it  may  be  expedient  to  make 
altogether  a new  translation.  Mr.  Mattoon’s  biblical  scholarship  and 
his  knowledge  of  Siamese  will  enable  him  to  perform  good  service  in 
this  work.  Schools  have  been  opened  on  the  mission  premises,  and  a 
small  number  of  boarding-scholars  are  under  daily  Christian  instruction. 
It  seems  to  be  not  unlikely  that  a Christian  element  may  be  largely 
introduced  into  the  education  of  Siamese  youth.  The  distribution 
of  the  Scriptures  in  Bangkok  and  in  the  interior  is  going  forward, 
and  many  of  the  people  are  not  only  able  to  read  and  willing  to  receive 
Christian  books,  but  give  a cordial  welcome  to  the  missionary,  and 
have  many  inquiries  to  make  about  this  new  religion.  Mrs.  Mattoon 
and  the  wives  of  the  other  missionaries  have  been  requested  by  the 
King  to  give  instruction  in  English  to  some  of  the  female  members  of 
his  family ; and  they  can  in  this  way  bring  before  persons  of  the  highest 
rank — -in  Eastern  countries  commonly  secluded  from  intercourse  with 
foreigners — the  all-important  lessons  of  the  gospel  of  Christ.  These 
engagements  are  still  in  progress,  and  may  result  in  the  greatest  good 
to  some  of  the  ladies  of  the  royal  family,  and  by  their  means  to  many 
others  in  high  and  low  stations.  One  of  their  pupils,  a princess  of 
amiable  disposition,  who  had  given  pleasing  attention  to  the  instruc- 
tions of  the  missionary  teachers,  was  suddenly  removed  by  death.  Her 
serious  interest  in  listening  to  the  story  of  the  cross  would  lead  us  to 
hope  that  her  trust  in  her  last  hour  may  have  been  placed  in  Jesus. 

In  connection  with  this  brief  sketch  of  missionary  labors,  the  char- 
acter of  the  present  King  of  Siam  should  be  taken  into  consideration. 
He  is  a Budhist  in  his  religious  profession  ; and  he  is  an  absolute  mon- 
arch. He  might  on  any  day  banish  every  missionary  from  his  kingdom. 
The  Church  must  ever  remember  that  her  dependence  is  not  on  the 
kings  of  the  earth,  but  on  the  God  of  heaven.  This  being  deeply  felt, 
it  is  still  allowable  to  survey  things  future  in  the  light  of  present  provi- 


MISSION  IN  SIAM. 


dences.  Now  lie  who,  contrary  to  human  expectation,  has  been  ele- 
vated to  the  throne  of  Siam,  possesses  a considerable  degree  of  Christian 
knowledge.  He  is  a much  more  enlightened  and  liberal  man  than  his 
predecessor.  He  has  learnt  the  English  language.  He  has  paid  some 
attention  to  the  history  of  our  country,  probably  led  to  this  by  his 
acquaintance  with  American  missionaries,  and  he  is- a warm  admirer 
of  Washington.  He  is  disposed  to  adopt  the  improvements  of  western 
civilization.  He  has  under  consideration  the  opening  of  a ship-canal  to 
connect  the  Gulf  of  Siam  with  the  Bay  of  Bengal — a measure  which 
would  prove  greatly  favorable  to  commerce  between  India  and  China, 
and  would  bring  his  hitherto  secluded  country  out  upon  one  of  the 
highways  of  the  world.  He  is  surrounded  by  the  priests  of  Budh,  but 
Christian  ministers  are  living  at  his  capital,  and  their  wives  are  giving 
lessons  of  Christian  truth  in  his  palace.  Reasons  of  state  policy  may 
commend  Budhism  to  his  pride,  but  the  Spirit  of  God  may  easily  con- 
strain his  heart  to  bow  unto  Him  who  is  the  King  of  kings  and  the 
Lord  of  lords.  The  influence  of  the  king  and  court  in  Siam  is  almost 
unbounded,  especially  in  all  religious  matters.  If  the  king  should 
embrace  Christianity,  a large  part  of  his  subjects  would  follow  his  ex- 


49 


ample.  They  are  in  some  degree  prepared  for  this,  by  their  acquaint- 
ance with  the  general  truths  of  the  Christian  religion ; the  circulation 
of  the  Scriptures  and  Christian  books,  and  other  labors  of  the  mission- 
aries, have  been  the  means  of  widely  disseminating  a knowledge  of  the 
gospel.  It  is,  therefore,  in  the  power  of  one  man,  not  only  to  make 
his  own  reign  an  era  in  the  history  of  his  country,  but  to  lead  his  peo- 
ple from  the  wat  to  the  church — from  a miserable  paganism  to  the  pro- 
fession of  Christianity  ; and  if  the  Spirit  of  the  Lord  were  poured  out 
from  on  high,  we  might  soon  see  in  Siam  “ a nation  born  in  a day.” 
“ The  king’s  heart  is  in  the  hand  of  the  Lord ; as  the  rivers  of  water, 
he  turneth  it  whithersoever  he  will.” 

The  short  but  marked  history  of  this  mission,  the  work  now  in  pro- 
gress, the  prospects  of  widely-extended  influence,  and  the  hope  of 
remarkable  success,  should  lead  the  Church  to  look  with  deep  interest 
on  this  missionary  field.  More  laborers  should  be  sent  out.  Faith 
should  be  in  exercise,  and  prayer  should  be  offered,  in  the  hope  of 
speedy  and  signal  displays  of  divine  grace.  On  these  conditions,  with 
God’s  blessing,  we  may  soon  be  permitted  to  see  a Christian  nation  in 
the  heart  of  south-eastern  Asia. 


VI. 

MISSIONS  IN  CHINA. 

“^nti  tfjese  from  the  3Lanh  of  Sfmm.” 


The  largest  field  of  modern  missions  is  China ; and,  unlike  India, 
China  is  a country  in  which  nearly  the  whole  work  of  evangelization 
is  yet  to  be  performed.  It  is  a country,  moreover,  to  which  events  now 
in  progress  have  attracted  the  attention  of  the  world.  Such  a 
missionary  field  has  peculiar  claims  on  the  Church  of  Christ.  We 
cannot  but  regret  that  our  sketch  of  it  must  be  a very  brief  one ; but 
though  it  will  be  unsatisfactory,  it  may  serve  to  turn  the  attention  of 
some  readers  to  works  in  which  they  will  find  full  accounts  of  this 
ancient  people.* 

The  Chinese  themselves  are  said  to  “ divide  their  empire  into  three 
principal  parts,  rather  by  the  different  form  of  government  which  they 
adopt  in  each,  than  by  any  geographical  arrangement : I.  The  Eight- 
een Provinces,  or  that  which  is  more  strictly  called  China,  or  China 
Proper ; it  is,  with  trivial  additions,  the  country  which  was  conquered 


* A Description  of  the  Empire  of  China  and  Chinese  Tartary,  together  with  the 
Kingdoms  of  Corea  and  Thibet,  &c.,  from  the  French  of  J.  B.  DuHalde,  Jesuit.  Two 
volumes  folio.  London. 

A General  Description  of  the  Empire  of  China  and  its  Inhabitants.  By  Sir  John 
Davis,  F.  E.  S.  Two  volumes,  18mo.  Harpers,  Hew  York. 

The  Middle  Kingdom ; a Survey  ...  of  the  Chinese  Empire  and  its  Inhabitants. 
By  S.  Wells  Williams.  Two  volumes,  12mo.  Hew  York,  Wiley  & Putnam.  [The 
best  work  on  China,  for  most  readers.] 

The  Chinese  Depository,  1833-1849,  8vo.  Published  monthly  at  Canton,  but  now 
discontinued. 


by  the  Manchus  in  1664.  II.  Manchuria,  or  the  native  country  of 
the  Manchus,  lying  north  of  the  gulf  of  Laintung,  and  east  of  the 
Inner  Daourian  Mountains  to  the  sea.  III.  Colonial  Possessions,  in- 
cluding Mongolia,  Hi,  (comprising  Sungaria  and  Eastern  Turkestan,) 
Koko-nor,  and  Thibet.”f  The  area  of  the  Chinese  Empire,  including 
Thibet  and  Chinese  Tartary  as  above  defined,  is  estimated  by  McCul- 
lough at  5,300,000  square  miles  ; that  of  China  Proper,  by  Williams, 
at  1,348,870  square  miles,  or  a territory  equal  to  that  of  all  the  States 
of  our  Union,  omitting  Iowa,  Wisconsin,  and  California. 

China  Proper,  to  which  this  sketch  will  now  be  confined,  may  be 
described  as  “ a broad  expanse  of  densely-populated  country,  forming 
nearly  a square ; two  sides  of  which  are  bounded  by  the  sea  and  two 
by  land.  The  sea  is  the  great  Pacific  Ocean,  which,  however,  does  not 
here  present  a well-defined  outline,  but  is  broken  into  great  Gulfs.  Of 
these  the  chief  is  denominated  the  Sea  of  China,  enclosed  by  Borneo,  the 
Philippines,  and  Formosa,  and  the  Yellow  Sea,  bounded  by  Tartary 
and  Corea.  The  interior  boundary  consists  of  a range  of  thinly-peopled 
tracts,  occupied  only  by  wandering  and  barbarous  tribes,  Manchu-Tar- 
tars,  Mongols,  Kalkals,  Eluths,  and  the  eastern  tribes  of  Thibet.” 

The  population  of  China  is  estimated  by  native  authorities  at 
; upwards  of  362,000,000.  Immense  as  this  number  is,  strong  reasons 


JAVAN 


Tsinan 


s™§aA 


ft  A' 


^Slianflaai 


^T^ankrrij 


Wiisl\an“  i; 


Chanislia 


>^VV  Kweiyaii* 


ASiidiau 


..  : \ « 

/ jtgmihm, 

F"  Kweilin  /f 


unnan 


Amov  I, > 


JAPAN E E I S LA N B S 


LiUi.ol'  Saronv  AC1?  Neu  York. 


MISSIONS  IN  CHINA.  51 


are  given  by  Medhurst  and  Williams  for  accounting  it  worthy  of  respect. 
It  was  received  as  reliable  by  the  Morrisons,  father  and  son,  than  whom 
no  better  judges  of  such  a question  could  be  found,  and  by  others  of 
almost  equal  authority.  This  estimate  makes  the  number  of  inhabit- 
ants in  China  equal  to  268  to  the  square  mile  ; in  France  the  ratio  is 
223,  and  in  Belgium  321 ; so  that  the  Chinese  estimate  may  be  admit- 
ted as  correct  without  much  hesitation.  We  may  receive  it  as  accu- 
rate the  more  readily,  when  we  learn,  that  the  greater  part  of  China 
Proper  consists  of  a rich,  level,  and  highly  cultivated  country,  watered 
by  some  of  the  largest  rivers  and  by  innumerable  canals. 

The  Chinese  may  take  a high  rank  as  a civilized  people.  They  have 
a government,  a literature,  many  social  usages,  numerous  industrial 
occupations,  cities,  roads,  bridges,  canals,  boats — all  indicating  a state 
of  society  far  removed  from  that  of  a barbarous  race.  Their  silk  fab- 
rics, their  ivory  and  wood  carving,  the  beautiful  works  of  their  potte- 
ries, their  being  the  first  to  discover  and  to  use  the  art  of  printing,  the 
compass,  and  gunpowder,  entitle  them  to  a place  among  the  cultivated 
nations.  The  last  example  just  cited,  and  the  theatrical  exhibitions 
which  are  held  in  high  esteem  among  them,  show  that  their  civilization 
is  that  of  our  fallen  nature,  not  of  a race  harmless  and  pure.  The  civil- 
ization of  the  Chinese  wants  altogether  the  great  element  of  Christian- 
ity. Give  them  the  gospel,  and  they  will  stand  before  long  amongst 
the  foremost  nations  of  the  world.  As  it  is,  they  are  superior  to  the 
self-lauding  Anglo-Saxon  and  other  European  races,  before  these  were 
lifted  up  from  their  early  condition  by  the  gospel  of  Christ.  The 
self-conceit  of  the  Chinese  is  equal  to  their  advancement,  and  their  ig- 
norance of  many  things  well  known  to  Europeans,  subjects  them  often 
to  the  ridicule  of  foreigners. 

If  in  some  of  its  aspects  we  may  speak  highly  of  the  Chinese  civili- 
zation, as  we  also  may  of  the  Grecian  and  Roman,  yet  when  we  survey 
their  religious  and  moral  system  we  find  it  necessary  to  classify  them 
with  the  Hindus,  the  Siamese,  and  other  heathen  people.  Their  reli- 
gion is  idolatry,  more  or  less  refined,  but  still  idolatry ; their  morals 
are  the  immorality  of  pagans  everywhere. 

The  Chinese  are  divided  into  three  religious  classes  : Confucianists, 
Rationalists,  and  Budhists.  The  first  is  a common,  though  not 


strictly  accurate  name  for  those  who  are  connected  with  the  State  reli- 
gion— which  is  described  as  composed,  not  of  doctrines,  but  of  rites 
and  ceremonies.  Numerous  sacrifices  are  offered  to  the  heavens,  the 
earth,  the  gods  of  land  and  grain,  the  tablets  of  deceased  monarchs, 
and  a great  variety  of  other  objects*  Confucius  himself  taught  but 
little  about  religious  matters,  and  his  name  is  given  to  this  form  of  reli- 
gion, because  the  sect  of  the  Learned,  commonly  called  Confucianists, 
are  its  principal  supporters.*  The  sect  of  the  Rationalists  was  founded 
by  Lautsz,  who  was  born  b.  c.  604,  about  fifty  years  before  Confucius. 
Lautsz  made  a god  of  Tau  or  Reason,  and  enjoined  retirement  and  medi- 
tation ; but  his  followers  worship  numerous  idols,  and  the  Rationalist 
or  Taouist  priests  are  said  to  be  often  little  better  than  cheats  and  jug- 
glers. The  Budhist  religion  was  introduced  into  China  in  the  first 
century  of  the  Christian  era,  and  is  ngw  widely  extended  through  the 
empire.  It  is  the  same  religion  in  China  as  in  Siam,  but  the  Chinese 
do  not  hold  its  priests  in  honor ; indeed,  no  order  of  priesthood  is 
regarded  with  much  reverence  in  this  country,  and  none  is  of  heredi- 
tary descent,  like  the  Hindu  Brahmans.  It  is  a fact  of  great  moment 
that  none  of  these  religious  systems  have  a strong  hold  on  the  heart 
of  the  Chinese.  The  worship  of  ancestors  forms  an  exception  to  this 
remark.  This  has  been  called  the  real  religion  of  China.  Its  require- 
ments are  faithfully  fulfilled  by  all,  even  the  poorest  classes,  and  that 
with  an  earnestness  which  shows  painfully  how  the  great  Deceiver 
has  pressed  into  his  service  one  of  the  best  affections  of  human  nature, 
that  of  filial  reverence.  But  with  this  exception,  the  Chinese  neither 
fear  nor  love  the  idols  in  their  temples.  They  have  been  known  to 
bring  them  out  under  the  burning  sun,  to  convince  them  that  rain  was 
greatly  needed ! They  present  at  times  rich  feasts  before  the  images, 
and  after  letting  them  stand  for  a while,  so  that  the  spirits  of  the  idols 
may  refresh  themselves  on  the  spirit  of  the  provisions,  they  then  take 
away  the  substantial  or  material  parts  for  their  own  use  ! Yet  their 
minds  are  full  of  superstitious  fears,  the  offspring  of  sin  and  ignorance, 
which  lead  them  to  perform  expensive  rites,  and  add  a tenfold  weight 
to  the  common  afflictions  of  life. 


* Williams,  vol.  ii.  p.  286. 


52  MANUAL  OF 


The  test  of  every  religion  is  its  influence  on  the  heart  and  life — on  this 
world  and  the  world  to  come.  The  religions  of  China  exert  no  good 
influence  upon  their  followers.  Many  evils  exist  which  these  religions 
do  not  restrain.  “ With  a general  regard  for  outward  decency,  they 
are  vile  and  polluted  in  a shocking  degree,  their  conversation  is  full 
of  filthy  expressions  and  their  lives  of  impure  acts.”  Falsehood  and 
ingratitude,  thieving,  dishonest  dealings,  are  enumerated  as  exceedingly 
common.  Polygamy  and  infanticide  both  prevail,  the  former  among 
persons  possessing  some  property,  the  latter  in  certain  districts.  And 
in  China,  as  in  every  heathen  country,  alas  for  the  poor,  the  afflicted, 
the  dying  ! What  can  paganism  do  for  these  ? 

There  are  difficulties  to  be  overcome  of  no  ordinary  magnitude, 
before  the  gospel  takes  full  possession  of  China.  One  of  these  is  found 
in  the  Chinese  language.  This  is  acknowledged  to  be  a hard  language 
to  learn,  though  good  facilities  exist  now  for  acquiring  it.  It  stands 
as  a serious  barrier  in  the  way  of  a missionary’s  usefulness  at  the  outset 
of  his  course.  It  is  a still  more  serious  hinderance  in  the  way  of 
receiving  written  knowledge  by  the  great  mass  of  the  Chinese  people. 
Several  years  must  be  spent  in  learning  merely  to  read,  intelligently, 
their  own  language,  while  comparatively  few  persons  can  possibly 
devote  so  large  an  amount  of  time  to  this  purpose.  The  result  is,  that 
while  numerous  readers  are  found  in  all  parts  of  the  empire,  the  great 
body  of  the  inhabitants  are  acquainted  only  with  the  colloquial  tongue ; 
and  this  is  found  to  differ  materially  in  different  provinces.  Whether 
this  colloquial  language  should  be  reduced  to  writing,  and  if  so,  on  what 
plan,  are  questions  of  deep  interest.  Something  of  this  kind  would 
seem  to  be  indispensable. 

The  apathy  of  the  Chinese  to  spiritual  things,  and  their  absorbing 
interest  in  seeking  wealth,  are  obstacles  to  their  reception  of  the  gospel, 
which,  though  not  peculiar  to  them,  are  among  no  other  people  more 
prominent.  Their  own  religion  feebly  presents  the  future  world 
to  their  minds,  and  it  is  found  to  be  very  difficult  to  gain  their 
earnest  attention  to  religious  truth.  Their  minds  are  not  destitute  of 
a certain  acuteness  and  vigor,  but  they  seem,  like  Gallio,  to  “ care  for 
none  of  these  things.”  The  Hindus  are  eminently  a religious  people, 
always  willing  to  take  up  religious  subjects  in  conversation,  and  often 


MISSIONS. 


ready  to  discuss  with  vehemence  the  claims  of  different  religious  sys- 
tems ; but  the  Chinese  are  more  nearly  an  atheistic  race  than  any  other 
nation.  The  Africans  are  eager  in  the  pursuit  of  gain,  but  their  habits 
are  simple  and  their  wants  comparatively  few ; the  struggle  for  gain 
in  China  is  forced  on  by  the  overcrowded  state  of  the  inhabitants 
pressing  closely  on  the  means  of  subsistence,  and  by  the  numerous 
wants  growing  out  of  their  advanced  civilization.  The  Chinese  do  not 
care  enough  for  their  religion  to  defend  it  like  the  Hindus ; they  do 
not  look  up  to  missionaries  as  belonging  to  a higher  rank,  like  the 
Africans  ; they  are  absorbed  in  worldly  matters  ; they  are  so  polite  as 
to  give  a ready  assent  to  arguments  overturning  their  own  belief ; and 
they  look  on  all  spiritual  things  without  reverence,  and  with  little  emo- 
tion, save  that  of  curiosity.  But  they  are  a people  marked  by  prac- 
tical energy,  ready  to  adapt  themselves  to  new  circumstances,  evincing 
common  sense  in  all  matters  with  which  they  are  acquainted ; and  it 
will  be  surprising  indeed  if,  when  they  come  to  understand  what 
Christianity  really  is,  and  when  they  become  the  subjects  of  its  power, 
they  do  not  prove  to  be  one  of  the  most  illustrious  among  Christian 
nations. 

In  the  mean  time  the  work  of  preparation  for  the  triumph  of  the 
gospel  in  China  is  going  on  apace.  They  are  no  longer  secluded  from 
western  nations.  They  are  themselves  an  emigrating  people,  com- 
pelled to  seek  their  subsistence  in  foreign  countries  by  causes  much 
more  urgent  than  those  which  bring  so  many  from  Germany  and  from 
Ireland  to  our  States.  They  can  no  longer  remain  an  isolated  nation, 
looking  with  a contemptuous  indifference  upon  “ the  outside  barbarians.” 
And  in  these  last  years,  in  the  progress  of  the  Insurrection  which  now 
seems  likely  to  subvert  the  Tartar  dynasty,  events  have  occurred  which 
must  tend  greatly  to  arouse  the  mind  of  the  Chinese,  so  long  apathetic 
as  to  religious  subjects.  The  leader  of  the  revolution  professes  his 
faith  in  the  Christian  religion.  With  serious  errors,  it  seems  certain 
that  he  and  his  followers  hold  firmly  many  important  Christian  doc- 
trines. It  is  also  certain  that  they  are  unsparing  iconoclasts  ; the  idol 
gods  obtain  no  mercy  at  their  hands.  How  wonderful  that  such  a 
movement  should  take  place  at  this  time ! Is  not  the  hand  of  God 
evidently  in  it? 


! 

MISSIONS  IN  CHINA.  53 


The  missions  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  among  the  Chinese  were 
commenced  at  Singapore,  in  1838.  At  that  time  their  jealousy  of 
foreigners  prevented  a station  being  formed  in  China  itself.  Mer- 
chants and  other  foreigners  were  permitted  to  live  only  at  Canton,  and 
were  there  restricted  within  the  limits  of  a few  warehouses  on  the  river. 
When  Dr.  Morrison,  the  first  Protestant  missionary  to  China,  entered 
on  his  work,  in  1807,  he  was  embarrassed  with  similar,  if  not  greater 
restrictions ; and  no  European  could  gain  access  to  other  places  on  the 
coast,  nor  penetrate  at  all  into  the  interior.  Hence  it  was  necessary 
to  station  the  missionaries  among  the  Chinese  emigrants  at  Batavia, 
Bangkok,  Singapore,  and  other  remote  places.  The  first  missionaries 
of  the  Board  were  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Robert  W.  Orr  and  John  A. 
Mitchell,  and  Mrs.  Orr,  who  arrived  at  their  station  in  April,  1838. 
In  October  following,  Mr.  Mitchell,  whose  health  was  delicate  when  he 
left  this  country,  was  called  to  his  rest.  With  Mr.  Orr,  he  had  visited 
Malacca  and  Penang,  and  Mr.  Orr  afterwards  visited  Bangkok,  to 
obtain  information  concerning  the  most  eligible  places  for  missionary 
work.  In  the  next  year  the  Chinese  teacher  employed  by  Mr.  Orr  was 
baptized  by  him.  In  July,  1840,  the  Rev.  Thomas  L.  McBryde  and 
his  wife  arrived  at  Singapore,  and  in  December  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Orr 
were  compelled  to  leave  their  work  by  the  failure  of  Mr.  Orr’s  health. 
In  July,  1841,  James  C.  Hepburn,  M.D.,  and  his  wife,  reached  Singa- 
pore, under  appointment  to  the  mission  in  Siam,  but  with  permission 
to  join  the  China  mission — a measure  which  the  return  of  Mr.  Orr  and 
other  reasons  made  expedient.  Towards  the  end  of  this  year  Mr.  and 
Mrs.  McBryde  went  up  to  Macao  for  the  benefit  of  a colder  climate. 
In  May,  1842,  the  Rev.  Walter  M.  Lowrie  arrived  at  Macao,  and 
sailed  about  a month  afterwards  for  Singapore.  This  voyage  was 
undertaken  with  reference  to  the  question  of  removing  the  mission  from 
that  place  to  China.  The  war  between  the  British  and  the  Chinese 
was  drawing  to  a close,  and  it  was  a deeply  important  matter  to  decide 
wisely  on  the  line  of  efforts  which  should  be  followed  under  the  new 
aspects  of  this  great  field  of  labor.  Mr.  Lowrie’s  voyage,  however, 
ended  in  the  shipwreck  of  the  vessel,  and  the  almost  miraculous  escape 
of  himself  and  most  of  the  ship’s  company.  After  sailing  four  hundred 
miles  in  open  boats,  and  encountering  a severe  gale  at  sea,  they  reached 


Luban,  a small  island  near  Manila,  and  Mr.  Lowrie  returned  to  Macao 
in  October. 

The  termination  of  the  war  between  the  British  and  the  Chinese  in 
this  year  changed  the  whole  question  as  to  the  stations  to  be  occupied. 
These  were  not  required  to  be  henceforth  at  places  many  hundreds  of 
miles  distant  from  China  ; five  of  the  principal  cities  on  the  coast  of  the 
country  were  now  open  to  the  residence  of  missionaries,  as  well  as 
of  other  foreigners.  Accordingly  it  was  deemed  expedient  for  Mr. 
McBryde  to  occupy  a station  on  Kulangsu,  a small  island  close  by 
the  city  of  Amoy.  To  this  island,  in  1843,  Dr.  Hepburn  removed 
from  Singapore,  after  spending  a few  months  at  Macao  while  the 
question  of  his  station  was  under  consideration.  In  October  Mr. 
McBryde  and  his  family  returned  to  this  country,  on  account  of  the 
failure  of  his  health.  In  February,  1844,  D.  B.  McCartee,  M.D.,  and 
Mr.  Richard  Cole,  a printer,  and  his  wife,  arrived  at  Macao ; in  July 
the  Rev.  Richard  Q.  Way  and  wife,  at  first  appointed  to  Siam ; in 
October  the  Rev.  Messrs.  M.  Simpson  Culbertson  and  Augustus  W. 
Loomis,  and  their  wives,  and  the  Rev.  Messrs.  John  Lloyd  and  Andrew 
P.  Happer,  M.D. ; and  in  May,  1845,  the  Rev.  Hugh  A.  Brown. 
The  number  of  brethren  thus  arriving  in  China  showed  that  the 
churches  were  willing  to  respond  to  the  call  of  providence  for  enlarged 
missionary  operations  in  this  country.  It  was  now  practicable  to  form 
plans  of  missionary  work  on  a wider  scale,  and  after  much  considera- 
tion it  was  determined  to  form  three  missions — at  Canton,  Amoy,  and 
Ningpo.  Messrs.  Happer  and  Cole  were  connected  with  the  Canton 
mission ; Messrs.  Lloyd,  Brown,  and  Hepburn  with  the  mission  at 
Amoy  ; and  Messrs.  Lowrie,  Way,  Loomis,  Culbertson,  and  McCartee 
with  the  Ningpo  mission. 

An  important  auxiliary  to  these  missions  is  the  printing-press.  A 
brief  account  of  this  deserves  a place  in  these  pages.  Preliminary 
to  this  notice  it  should  be  stated,  that  in  no  other  heathen  country  are 
there  so  many  readers  as  in  China,  and  that  there  the  process  of  print- 
ing has  long  been  in  use.  The  Chinese  method  of  printing,  however, 
is  a very  imperfect  one  ; the  types  are  blocks  of  wood,  on  which  each 
letter  or  character  has  been  engraved  by  the  hand  of  the  artist,  and 
the  impressions  are  taken  by  means  of  a brush  for  the  ink  and  a block 


54=  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS 


for  the  press,  the  whole  being  an  operation  so  slow,  that  only  the 
patience  of  a Chinaman  is  equal  to  its  demands.  Our  admiration,  how- 
ever, is  due  to  the  invention  itself,  and  to  the  neatness  and  economy  of 
the  printing  thus  executed ; but  in  this  day  of  finished  machinery,  and 
of  large  stereotype  editions  of  the  Scriptures  and  other  books,  this  im- 
perfect process  does  not  suit  the  exigences  of  the  Church  in  her  mis- 
sionary work.  On  the  other  hand,  a serious  and  apparently  insuperable 
difficulty  in  the  way  of  printing,  either  by  machinery  or  by  the  use  of 
metallic  types,  was  found  in  the  large  number  of  Chinese  letters  or  cha- 
racters. This  number  is  estimated  at  30,000  ; a common  printing-office 
case  contains  but  56. 

For  a satisfactory  statement  of  the  “discovery,”  as  it  may  well  be 
called,  of  the  method  of  printing  this  multitude  of  Chinese  characters 
with  a small  number  of  metallic  types,  the  reader  may  consult  the 
Annual  Report  of  the  Western  Foreign  Missionary  Society,  May,  1837. 

It  turns  on  the  distinction  between  the  formatives  and  primitives  in  the 
Chinese  language,  and  between  the  divisible  and  the  indivisible  charac- 
ters. The  divisible  are  reduced  to  their  simplest  elements,  and  being 
struck  off  as  types,  can  be  re-composed  in  different  characters,  so  that 
a comparatively  small  number  of  types  will  serve  to  express  most  of 
the  characters  in  common  use.  At  the  instance  of  the  Corresponding 
Secretary  of  the  Board,  whose  previous  study  of  this  language  had 
prepared  him  to  take  a deep  interest  in  this  matter,  the  Committee 
agreed  in  1836  to  order  a set  of  the  matrices  for  this  new  mode  of 
printing  Chinese.  These  matrices  were  made  in  Paris,  at  a cost  of  over 
$5000.  Types  were  cast  from  them  in  New- York  by  Mr.  Cole  ; and  at 
Macao  both  he  and  Mr.  Lowrie  gave  much  time  and  labor  to  perfecting 
the  types,  arranging  the  cases,  and  other  things  requisite  to  the  practi- 
cal application  of  this  new  invention.  Many  fears  and  some  predic- 
tions of  failure  were  happily  disappointed,  and  its  success  may  be 
regarded  as  an  era  in  the  history  of  this  people.  For  several  years  this 
mode  of  printing  has  been  in  operation.  Large  editions  of  works  are 
printed,  from  stereotype  plates,  on  improved  presses,  such  as  are  in  use 
in  our  own  country,  which  will  be  driven  by  steam-power  when  | 
the  Chinese  become  a Christian  people.  It  is  of  interest  to  add,  that 
but  for  the  order  given  by  the  Committee  in  1836  for  a set  of  these 


matrices,  this  great  invention  would  probably  not  have  been  brought 
into  use.  So  little  confidence  was  felt  in  its  practicability,  that  no  other 
Missionary  Institution  would  give  it  their  patronage.  Only  one  other 
order  was  received  by  the  artist,  and  without  at  least  two  orders,  he 
could  not  proceed  with  the  work. 

In  1845  the  printing-press  was  removed  from  Macao  to  Ningpo,  and 
upwards  of  3,500,000  pages  were  printed.  A station  was  occupied  at 
Chusan,  an  island  not  far  distant  from  Ningpo,  which  was  then  in  the 
possession  of  the  British.  This  was  an  experiment  to  determine  whether 
other  places  besides  the  cities  opened  under  the  treaty  could  be  occu- 
pied by  missionaries  ; but  it  was  found  that  the  authorities  civilly  but 
firmly  opposed  their  permanent  residence  there,  although  the  people  of 
the  island  were  friendly ; and  the  station  was  relinquished  soon  after 
the  island  was  restored  by  the  British  to  the  Chinese, 
z'  In  1846,  Dr.  and  Mrs.  Hepburn  reached  this  country,  being  compel- 
led to  return  by  the  state  of  Mrs.  Hepburn’s  health.  In  December,  the 
Rev.  Messrs.  William  Speer  and  John  B.  French,  and  Mrs.  Speer, 
arrived  at  Canton,  and  the  Rev.  John  W.  Quarterman  joined  the 
Ningpo  mission.  A church  was  organized  at  Ningpo  in  May  ; board- 
ing-schools were  opened  at  Canton  and  Ningpo  ; and  most  of  the  mis- 
sionaries were  now  sufficiently  acquainted  with  the  Chinese  language  to 
conduct  religious  services  in  chapels,  and  to  make  known  the  gospel  by 
the  way-side. 

The  year  1847  was  marked  by  the  death  of  Mrs.  Speer  on  the  16th 
of  April,  and  of  Mr.  Lowrie  on  the  19th  of  August — the  latter  under 
most  afflicting  circumstances,  by  the  hands  of  Chinese  pirates.*  Mr. 
Cole’s  connection  with  the  mission  ceased,  and  Mr.  Happer  was  married 
to  a daughter  of  Dr.  Ball,  an  American  missionary  at  Canton. 

In  1848,  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Joseph  K.  Wight  and  Henry  Y.  Rankin,  and 
their  wives,  arrived  in  China,  to  join  the  Ningpo  mission.  Mr.  Brown 
was  compelled  to  return  to  this  country,  by  the  state  of  his  health,  and 


* See  Memoirs  of  the  Rev.  Walter  M.  Lowrie  : New-York,  1849 : Robert  Carter  & 
Brothers.  He  was  a member  of  a Convention  of  Missionaries  at  Shanghai,  engaged  in 
the  translation  of  the  Scriptures,  and  was  returning  to  his  station  at  Ningpo,  when  he 
was  taken,  as  by  a martyr's  death,  to  his  rest. 


on  the  6th  of  December  Mr.  Lloyd  was  called  to  his  rest.  The  station 
at  Amoy  has  not  since  been  occupied  by  the  Board. 

In  1849,  Mr.  Moses  S.  Coulter  and  his  wife  arrived  in  China — Mr. 
Coulter  having-  been  appointed  to  take  charge  of  the  press  at  Xingpo, 
while  continuing  his  studies  for  the  work  of  the  ministry. 

In  1850,  the  Rev.  Messrs.  Samuel  X.  and  William  P.  Martin,  and 
their  wives,  arrived  at  Xingpo.  Mr.  Loomis  and  his  wife  and  Mr. 
Speer  returned  to  this  country,  on  account  of  their  health.  A new 
mission  was  formed  at  Shanghai,  to  which  Mr.  Wight  and  Mr.  Cul- 
bertson were  appointed — the  latter  with  a special  view  to  the  work  of 
translating  the  Scriptures. 

In  1851,  Mr.  French  was  married  to  the  second  daughter  of  Dr. 
Ball,  the  sister  of  Mrs.  Happer;  and  in  1852,  the  Rev.  John  Byers 
and  his  wife  and  Miss  Juana  M.  Knight  arrived  in  China,  the  latter 
to  be  associated  with  her  sister,  Mrs.  Rankin,  in  the  female  boarding 
school  at  Xingpo,  and  Mr.  Byers  to  be  stationed  at  Shanghai.  Mr. 
Coulter  was  called  to  his  rest,  on  the  12th  of  December,  and  the  health 
of  Mr.  Byers  having  given  way  shortly  after  reaching  his  station,  he 
and  his  wife  started  on  their  voyage  homewards,  but  he  was  also  taken 
to  his  rest  on  the  8th  of  April,  1853.  In  August,  the  Rev.  John 
Xevius  and  his  wife  sailed  for  Xingpo,  and  in  Xovember  the  Rev. 
Charles  F.  Preston,  and  J.  G.  Kerr,  M.D.,  and  his  wife,  for  Canton. 
In  this  year  also,  Dr.  McCartee  was  married  to  Miss  Knight. 

In  April,  1854,  the  Rev.  Reuben  Lowrie  and  his  wife  embarked  for 
China,  to  be  connected  with  the  Shanghai  mission. 

This  is  but  a slight  sketch  of  the  missions  of  the  Board  in  China, 
yet  it  shows  that  an  important  work  is  in  steady  progress.  Twelve 
ministers  and  two  physicians,  nearly  all  of  whom  are  married  men,  are 
stationed  at  the  cities  of  Canton,  Shanghai,  and  Xingpo.  The  board- 
ing-schools contain  about  sixty  boys  and  thirty  girls,  and  the  day-schools 
about  sixty  boys.  The  church  at  Xingpo  numbers  twenty-three  com- 
municants. The  printing-press  at  that  city  has  sent  forth  upwards  of 
24,000,000  of  pages  of  the  Sacred  Scriptures  and  other  Christian  pub- 
lications, and  is  still  in  effective  operation.  The  medico-missionary 
labors  of  Mr.  Happer  and  Dr.  McCartee  have  exerted  a wide-spread 


influence  in  favor  of  the  Christian  religion,  which  is  perceived  to 
inspire  its  followers  with  benevolence,  and  to  confer  evident  blessings 
on  the  poor  and  needy.  Dr.  McCartee’s  influence,  as  a Christian  phy- 
sician, is  such  as  might  well  be  envied  by  the  most  favored  of  his  pro- 
fessional brethren  in  any  of  our  own  cities.  Xumerous  chapels,  most 
of  them  rooms  hired  for  the  purpose,  are  open  for  religious  services, 
and  at  Xingpo  a large  and  convenient  church  has  been  erected,  in 
which  public  worship  is  regularly  conducted.  The  gospel  has  been 
frequently  proclaimed,  also,  at  the  temples  and  other  places  of  public 
concourse,  and  in  the  villages  in  the  vicinity  of  Xingpo. 

By  means  of  these  various  labors,  the  leaven  of  divine  truth  has 
been  extensively  diffused,  and  is  producing  its  appropriate  influence. 
A signal  example  of  this  occurred  during  the  last  year,  in  connection 
with  the  Xingpo  mission.  A part  of  the  sacred  volume,  received  from 
a missionary,  was  carried  by  a Chinaman  to  his  own  village,  at  some 
distance  in  the  interior  of  the  country.  It  seems  to  have  made  no 
impression  on  the  mind  of  him  who  first  received  it,  but  it  fell  into  the 
hands  of  an  aged  man,  who  for  fourscore  years  had  been  a worshipper 
of  idols.  His  attention  was  awakened  to  consider  this  new  religion, 
and  he  concluded  to  go  in  search  of  the  giver  of  this  strange  book. 
He  came  to  Xingpo,  took  up  his  abode  on  the  premises  of  one  of  the 
missionaries,  and  spent  his  time  in  reading  the  sacred  volume  and 
attending  to  the  instructions  of  his  kind  teacher, — often  coming  with 
the  Bible  in  his  hand  to  ask  for  explanations  of  difficult  passages,  and 
manifesting  a teachable  spirit.  After  some  months  thus  employed,  he 
gave  pleasing  evidence  of  being  a subject  of  divine  grace,  and  was 
received  into  the  church  of  Christ  by  baptism,  in  the  presence  of  a 
large  congregation  of  his  heathen  countrymen.  Could  any  thing  more 
clearly  attest  that  the  gospel  is  the  power  of  God  unto  salvation  ? 
Commonly  we  indulge  little  hope  of  the  conversion  of  very  aged  per- 
sons, even  in  Christian  lands ; but  here,  in  the  adorable  exercise  of 
God’s  sovereignty  in  grace,  we  see  an  aged  idolater,  living  far  distant 
from  the  ministrations  of  the  sanctuary,  brought  into  the  communion 
of  the  saints ! Such  an  example  shows  that  nothing  is  too  hard  for 
Almighty. 


MISSIONS  IN  CHINA 


;n 


56  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


The  Mission  to  the  Chinese  in  Califoria  properly  follows  tlie 
missions  in  China  itself.  The  fame  of  the  gold  mines  has  drawn  some 
thousands  of  this  gain-seeking  people  to  our  shores.  Thus  far,  they  have 
nearly  all  come  from  the  province  of  Canton,  and  speak  the  dialect  of 
that  province.  The  Kev.  William  Speer  and  his  wife  commenced  their 
labors  amongst  them  at  San  Francisco  in  the  autumn  of  1852.  Hav- 
ing been  stationed  at  Canton  in  former  years,  his  health  being  now  re- 
stored, Mr.  Speer  could  at  once  speak  unto  them  in  them  tongue  the 
wonderful  works  of  God.  Their  civil  relations  to  each  other  were  now 
reversed  ; they  are  the  foreigners,  and  their  missionary  could  bid  them 
welcome  to  his  native  land  ; accordingly,  his  visits  were  well  received 
by  them.  He  found  several  Chinese  patients  in  the  hospital,  who 
were  grateful  for  his  instructions  and  aid ; a school  was  opened,  but 
the  attendance  was  not  regular.  After  some  time,  an  eligible  place  of 
worship  was  secured  for  a few  months,  where  services  were  conducted 
in  the  Chinese  language,  with  a varying  audience.  Eventually  the 
liberality  of  residents  of  San  Francisco  provided  a suitable  building 
for  the  use  of  the  mission,  in  which  it  is  designed  to  have  a school  and 
a chapel,  with  convenient  apartments  for  the  family  of  the  missionary. 
Many  of  the  Chinese  gave  handsome  donations  towards  the  purchase 
of  this  property. 

Among  the  favorable  incidents  in  the  brief  history  of  this  mission, 
it  may  be  noted  that  some  of  the  former  pupils  in  the  mission  schools 
in  China  were  found  in  California.  They  were  predisposed  to  give  a 
hearty  reception  to  one  whose  character  and  motives  were  at  once 
understood  by  them.  Another  favorable  providence  was  the  return  to 
China  of  an  influential  man,  whose  influence  would  have  been  strongly 
arrayed  against  the  mission,  and  the  choice  as  his  successor,  to  be  the 
head  of  a company  or  association  of  Chinese,  of  a man  who  looked 
with  a friendly  eye  upon  these  efforts  for  the  benefit  of  his  people. 
Afterwards  a few  Christians  were  found,  who  had  been  received  into 
the  church  by  missionaries  in  their  native  land.  Their  conduct  appears 
to  have  been  worthy  of  their  profession  ; they  rested  from  work  on  the 
Sabbath,  even  at  the  mines,  and  met  together  for  religious  worship ; 
but  their  wandering  life  prevented  their  forming  a regular  congrega- 


tion. In  the  early  part  of  the  present  year,  Mr.  Speer  was  permitted 
to  organize  a church  at  San  Francisco,  with  four  Chinese  communi- 
cants, one  of  whom  was  ordained  as  a ruling  elder.  Thus  an  auspicious 
beginning  has  been  made. 

The  future  influence  of  this  mission  will  of  course  depend  to  a consider- 
able extent  on  the  number  of  Chinese  who  may  seek  a temporary  or  a 
permanent  home  in  our  land.  There  are  causes  which  render  it  not 
unlikely  that  large  numbers  of  them  will  come  to  this  country.  Some 
of  these  have  been  already  referred  to  ; others  need  not  be  here  speci- 
fied. On  the  other  hand,  their  emigration  may  be  checked,  as  indeed  it 
was  for  a time,  by  the  harsh  and  un-American  treatment  which  they 
met  with  from  some  of  our  countrymen — or  more  likely  from  some  of 
the  reprobate  foreigners.  The  impositions  to  which  they  are  subject 
at  the  mines  will  go  far  to  deter  them  from  remaining,  and  to  prevent 
others  from  coming.  These  oppressions  are  disgraceful  to  those  who 
are  guilty  of  them  ; but  with  a better  tone  of  morals  at  the  mines, 
every  thing  of  this  kind  must  cease.  It  seems  quite  clear  that  our 
countrymen  should  encourage  and  not  repel  the  immigration  of  the  Chi- 
nese. They  will  form  a most  valuable  class  of  laborers,  being  indus- 
trious, peaceable,  and  frugal.  It  may  easily  come  to  pass  that  the 
Chinese  will  to  a large  extent  supplant  the  Negroes,  in  the  cultivation 
of  rice,  cotton,  and  the  sugar-cane.  They  will  be  found  to  be  a supe- 
rior class  of  laborers,  and  every  way  less  expensive.  Their  employ- 
ment in  this  country,  not  merely  in  the  mines  of  California,  nor  in  the 
slave  States  of  the  South,  but  in  many  avocations  in  all  the  States, 
especially  as  servants,  may  become  obviously  desirable  and  quite  expe- 
dient to  our  own  citizens,  while  it  will  afford  a comfortable  subsistence 
to  myriads  of  our  now  half-starving  fellow-creatures  in  China.  Above 
all,  it  will  bring  them  within  the  reach  of  Christian  instruction  and 
example,  and  result  in  the  salvation  of  multitudes  of  them  in  our  own 
day  and  in  ages  to  come.  The  wonderful  ordering  of  Providence  that 
has  already  brought  so  many  of  them  to  our  shores  should  awaken 
attention  to  their  condition,  and  to  the  claims  on  the  missionary  efforts 
of  the  churches  of  the  great  nation  whom  they  represent. 


VII. 

MISSIONS  AMONG  ROMAN  CATHOLICS. 

“ ffionre  out  of  Jet,  mu  people.’' 


The  foreign  work  of  evangelization  falls  within  the  province  of 
the  Board,  as  constituted  by  the  General  Assembly.  Its  sphere  of 
labor  is  not  restricted  to  Pagan  or  Mohammedan  nations,  but  includes 
all  in  foreign  countries  who  stand  in  need  of  the  gospel,  so  far  as  they 
may  be  brought  by  Providence  before  the  Church  as  objects  of  her 
benevolence.  In  1845,  it  was  considered  important  to  support  mis- 
sions among  the  Roman  Catholic  inhabitants  of  some  of  the  European 
states. 

The  Papal  Church  and  also  the  Greek  Church  must  be  regarded  as 
corrupt  and  fallen  Christian  bodies.  Most  of  their  members  are  hardly 
less  in  need  of  the  gospel  than  the  followers  of  Zoroaster  or  Confucius. 
The  Budhist  religion  contains  little  more  of  actual  idolatry  than  may 
be  sometimes  witnessed  in  the  Papal  worship  ; indeed,  there  is  such  a 
close  and  singular  resemblance  between  the  monks  and  nuns  and  rites 
of  the  two  systems,  that  the  Romanist  missionaries  in  the  East  have 
been  greatly  perplexed  by  it,  and  hindered  in  their  attempts  to  prose- 
lyte the  Budhists  to  the  western  faith.  Most  of  the  Romanists  wor- 
ship Mary  not  less  than  our  Lord  and  Saviour,  and  trust  in  her  inter- 
cession and  that  of  other  fellow-creatures,  as  having  a prevailing  power 
with  God,  while  they  rely  for  salvation  on  the  performance  of  certain 
external  rites.  The  Bible  is  not  permitted  by  their  religious  rulers  to 
be  their  guide ; — but  it  is  not  needful  to  enumerate  proofs  to  establish 
the  essentially  un-christian  and  anti-christian  character  of  the  Papal 


system.  And  the  same  view  must  be  taken  of  the  Greek  religious 
system.  We  would  charitably  hope  that  many  of  the  members  of 
these  bodies  are  true  Christians,  not  perceiving  or  not  adopting  the 
fatal  errors  of  their  churches.  But  of  the  ignorant  masses  in  Russia, 
France,  Spain,  Portugal,  Mexico,  and  the  South  American  States,  we 
can  form  no  opinion  that  would  go  to  exonerate  Christians  of  a purer 
faith  from  the  duty  of  seeking  their  salvation  by  missionary  labors,  in 
so  far  as  these  may  be  practicable. 

This  view  of  the  duty  of  the  Protestant  Church  is  the  more  impres- 
sive, because  of  the  vast  numbers  of  our  fellow-men  whom  it  contem- 
plates. Nearly  a fifth  part  of  the  human  family  is  in  bondage  to  the 
Greek  and  Papal  churches.  Moreover,  some  of  these  corrupt  Chris- 
tian states  exert  a powerful  influence  over  other  nations.  Russia  and 
France  are  leading  powers  in  the  old  world ; and  each  appears  to 
be  the  protector  and  the  propagandist  of  the  giant  systems  of  religious 
error  severally  prevailing  in  these  countries.  Other  Roman  Catholic 
nations  are  specially  related  to  our  own  country, — some,  like  Ireland 
and  Germany,  by  the  streams  of  emigration  which  they  are  sending 
to  our  shores ; others,  like  Mexico  and  the  South  American  repub- 
lics, by  near  geographical  position,  and  by  their  having  attempted 
to  form  the  same  political  institutions  with  our  own.  The  failure  of 
these  republics  must  be  ascribed  mainly  to  the  Roman  Catholic  religion 
of  their  inhabitants,  a religion  which  withholds  the  knowledge  and 

57 


58  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


the  mental  liberty  necessary  to  every  kind  of  well-ordered  government, 
and  indispensable  to  the  success  of  a republic  in  our  age. 

These  fallen  Christian  nations,  therefore,  present  an  important  sphere 
for  evangelical  missions,  and  should  be  regarded  with  deep  interest  by 
the  churches  of  our  country.  It  will  not  be  found  expedient,  however, 
to  conduct  the  missionary  work  amongst  them  in  the  same  method  as 
among  pagan  nations.  The  peculiar  circumstances  of  each  people 
must  be  well  considered.  The  same  plan  of  action  will  not  equally 
suit  France  and  New  Granada.  In  some  countries  the  door  is  open 
to  chaplains  for  Protestant  residents  and  visitors,  who  would  be  brought 
more  or  less  in  contact  with  the  Romanist  population.  At  some  places, 
schools  might  be  established,  which  if  conducted  prudently  would  afford 
many  opportunities  of  diffusing  evangelical  truth.  In  others,  native 
Protestants  have  legal  rights,  and  may  in  various  ways  disseminate  their 
religious  opinions.  In  most,  the  Holy  Scriptures  may  be  circulated  by 
judicious  measures.  In  all,  we  may  hope  that  the  restrictions  now 
imposed  on  free  religious  discussion  will  eventually  be  removed.  This 
will  certainly  be  done  when  the  power  of  the  Pope  and  the  Russian 
Autocrat  is  broken ; and  broken  it  surely  will  be,  for  it  is  arrayed 
against  the  King  of  kings.  It  cannot  stand. 

The  first  measure  adopted  by  the  Board  in  this  field  of  labor  was 
that  of  placing  funds  in  the  hands  of  certain  Christian  friends  in 
Europe,  to  be  employed  at  their  discretion  in  the  work  of  evangeliza- 
tion. In  the  aggregate,  between  forty  and  fifty  thousand  dollars  have 
been  remitted  for  this  purpose  to  Paris,  Geneva,  Belgium,  and  Italy. 
The  Christian  brethren  to  whom  these  funds  have  been  intrusted  are 
men  who  hold  the  doctrines  commonly  known  as  Calvinistic,  and  whose 
views  of  church  order  are  essentially  Presbyterian.  Their  position  in 


the  midst  of  their  own  people  gives  them  the  means  of  employing 
these  missionary  funds  to  the  best  advantage,  whether  in  the  sup- 
port of  evangelists  and  colporteurs,  or  in  the  circulation  of  the  Sacred 
Scriptures  and  other  evangelical  publications.  The  published  reports 
and  letters  of  these  Christian  friends  have  abundantly  shown,  that 
this  method  of  promoting  the  cause  of  Christ  on  the  continent  of 
Europe  deserves  to  be  vigorously  prosecuted.  It  is  not  likely  that 
it  will  soon  become  expedient  to  send  missionaries  from  this  coun- 
try to  these  Romanist  nations.  They  would  be  objects  of  jealousy 
and  suspicion,  and  their  imperfect  acquaintance  with  the  language  and 
usages  of  the  people  would  stand  in  the  way  of  their  usefulness.  The 
plan  of  proceeding  adopted  has  the  merit  of  being  efficient,  moreover, 
without  involving  much  expense  for  conducting  its  details. 

An  apparent  exception  to  this  line  of  policy  has  been  made,  by  the 
appointment  of  a member  of  one  of  the  Presbyteries  to  labor  as  a mis- 
sionary among  Roman  Catholics  in  Ireland.  But  this  appointment 
was  made  under  somewhat  special  circumstances,  and  is  regarded 
rather  as  an  experiment  than  as  a precedent. 

The  Board  would  be  willing,  however,  and  is  desirous,  to  send  mis- 
sionaries to  some  places  on  the  borders  of  Mexico,  the  Isthmus  of 
Panama,  and  in  some  of  the  South  American  States.  A minister  was 
appointed  at  one  time  to  a station  on  the  Isthmus  of  Panama,  but  the 
state  of  his  health  induced  him  eventually  to  decline  entering  upon 
this  work.  A minister  of  the  Presbytery  of  New  York  has  been  sent 
lately  to  Buenos  Ayres,  South  America,  where  it  is  hoped  he  will  find 
the  way  prepared  for  direct  and  indirect  labors  in  the  work  of  evan- 
gelization. Other  important  places  might  be  occupied  by  men  of 
suitable  qualifications. 


VIII. 

MISSIONS  AMONG  THE  JEWS. 

“&U  Esrael  sfiall  fie  safiefi.” 


The  field  of  missionary  labor  among  the  Israelites  seems  to  fall 
within  the  province  of  the  Board,  on  a subjective  rather  than  a geo- 
graphical view  of  its  sphere  of  action.  This  singular  people  may  be 
regarded  as  foreigners  in  all  lands,  except  the  land  to  which  they  are 
so  devotedly  attached,  while  in  it  they  are  less  at  home  than  in  most 
other  countries.  The  peculiar  qualifications  required  by  missionaries 
amongst  them  may  be  considered  as  one  of  the  reasons  for  placing  this 
department  of  the  evangelistic  wrork  of  the  Church  under  the  direction 
of  the  Foreign  Board.  These  qualifications  are,  in  important  respects, 
foreign  to  the  usual  routine  of  preparation  for  preaching  the  gospel  to 
our  own  countrymen.  Missionaries  to  the  Jews  must  first  acquire  a 
knowledge  of  their  vernacular  language,  which  in  comparatively  few 
instances  is  the  English  ; and  they  must  add  to  this  a careful  study  of 
Rabbinical  and  Talmudical  learning,  as  well  as  of  the  peculiar  opinions 
and  usages  which  prevail  amongst  them.  The  work  itself  of  mission- 
aries to  the  Jews  in  our  cities  is  nearly  the  same  as  would  devolve  on 
them,  if  they  were  stationed  in  some  foreign  country. 

Whether  they  live  in  our  own  cities,  or  in  Europe,  Africa  or  Asia,  the 
J ews  will  be  found  a singular,  difficult,  but  n#t  hopeless  class  of  hearers 
of  the  gospel.  In  some  respects  they  are  the  same  people  wherever 
they  are  found,  agreeing  especially  in  acknowledging  the  true  God,  and, 
alas ! in  disowning  still  their  Lord  and  Saviour  ; but,  in  other  respects, 
they  differ  widely  from  each  other.  Some  adhere  rigidly  to  the  Mosaic 


system,  ritual  as  well  as  moral ; but  most  add  to  this  the  observance  of 
the  traditions  of  the  Rabbis,  or  of  what  they  term  the  oral  law  of  their 
great  prophet.  Others  have  become  widely  latitudinarian,  putting  a 
rationalistic  construction  on  the  writings  of  Moses.  Many  are 
extremely  ignorant,  and  are  the  subjects  of  superstition.  Not  a few 
have  launched,  without  compass  or  helm,  into  the  regions  of  scepticism. 
But  whatever  views  may  have  been  adopted  by  them,  or  whatever  the 
circumstances  in  which  they  are  found,  they  are  all  alike  remarkable 
for  not  being  at  rest.  They  are  wanderers,  unsettled,  restless.  And 
never  will  they  find  rest  until  they  comply  with  our  Lord’s  invitation  : 
“ Come  unto  me,  all  ye  that  labor  and  are  heavy  laden,  and  I will  give 
you  rest.  Take  my  yoke  upon  you,  and  learn  of  me  ; for  I am  meek 
and  lowly  in  heart ; and  ye  shall  find  rest  unto  your  souls.  For  my 
yoke  is  easy,  and  my  burden  is  light.”  Matthew  xi.  28-30. 

The  first  missionary  to  the  Jews  appointed  by  the  Board  was  the 
Rev.  Matthew  R.  Miller,  who  entered  on  his  work  in  1846.  His 
appointment  was  made  with  the  expectation  of  his  occupying  a station 
in  some  country  abroad ; but  it  was  considered  expedient  for  him  to 
acquire  the  German  language  and  some  knowledge  of  Rabbinical 
Hebrew,  previous  to  his  leaving  his  native  country.  The  best  facilities 
for  studying  these  are  easily  within  reach  in  this  city,  and  for 
some  time  he  was  under  the  instructions  of  an  eminent  German  Jewish 
Rabbi,  and  had  his  lodgings  in  a German  Jewish  family.  While  pro- 

59 


60  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


secuting  these  preparatory  studies,  much  information  was  obtained 
concerning  the  Jewish  population  of  this  country.  It  was  found  that 
their  numbers  were  considerable — over  20,000  at  that  time,  and  esti- 
mated now  at  about  30,000 ; and  that  here  they  are  not  less,  if  not 
more,  accessible  to  a Christian  missionary  than  in  most  cities  abroad  ; 
while  hardly  any  systematic  efforts  were  in  progress  to  direct  their 
minds  to  Him  whet  is  the  hope  of  Israel.  Under  these  circumstances 
it  seemed  to  be  expedient  that  Mr.  Miller  should  be  stationed  in 
New  York,  where  he  entered  zealously  upon  his  work,  but  made 
occasional  visits  to  Jews  in  other  places.  He  was  able  to  maintain 
considerable  intercourse  with  individuals,  some  of  them  Rabbis.  He 
wrote  numerous  articles  on  particular  points  of  the  Jewish  controversy, 
some  of  which  were  inserted  in  Jewish  periodicals,  and  a Tract  on 
Christianity,  as  the  true  development  of  the  Hebrew  religious  system. 

In  1848  the  Rev.  John  Neander  was  associated  with  Mr.  Miller  in 
New  York.  In  184S,  the  Rev.  Bernard  Steinthal  was  appointed  to 
labor  among  the  Jews  in  Philadelphia,  and  in  1850  the  Rev.  Frederick 
I.  Neuhaus  among  the  Jews  in  Baltimore.  In  1852  Sir.  Miller  was  com- 
pelled by  the  state  of 'his  health  to  withdraw  from  this  work.  In  1853 
Mr.  Julius  Strauss,  a licentiate  preacher,  received  a temporary  ap- 
pointment to  labor  in  New  York.  The  missionaries  now  employed 
are  all  Jews  by  birth  and  Germans  in  language,  though  also  speaking 
English. 

It  has  been  found  to  be  quite  impracticable  to  collect  the  Jews 
together  for  religious  services,  and  the  work  of  the  missionary  has  to 
be  performed  on  the  colporteur  system,  as  it  was  adopted  and  is  still 
followed  in  Europe ; that  is,  visits  are  made  at  the  houses  of  J ews,  con- 
versations are  held  with  them,  the  Scriptures  and  Christian  tracts  are 
placed  in  their  hands,  kindness  is  shown  to  them,  and  opportunities  for 
exerting  a Christian  influence  over  them  are  carefully  sought  and 
improved.  Labors  of  this  kind  have  been  steadily  conducted  for 
some  time.  No  • doubt  much  good  seed  has  been  thus  sown,  and 
though  much  of  it  should  bear  no  fruit,  there  is  pleasing  evidence 
that  some  of  it  has  not  been  lost.  One  of  the  converts  is  now  pursuing 
studies  with  a view  to  the  Christian  ministry.  A few  others  appear  to 
be  walking  worthy  of  their  Christian  profession.  The  missionaries, 


however,  have  to  take  up  the  language  of  the  prophet,  “ Who  hath 
believed  our  report  ? And  to  whom  is  the  arm  of  the  Lord  revealed  ?” 

That  faithful  efforts  should  be  made  by  the  Church  for  the  conver- 
sion of  the  Jews,  appears  to  be  a very  plain  duty.  It  may  be  conceded 
that,  as  a people,  they  are  enduring  the  anger  of  God  for  the  great  sin 
of  rejecting  our  blessed  Lord ; yet  we  learn  nowhere  in  the  Scriptures 
that  Christians  are  appointed  to  be  the  executioners  of  the  divine 
justice  upon  them,  while,  on  the  other  hand,  the  commission  of  every 
Christian  minister  requires  him  to  preach  the  gospel  to  every  creature, 
to  Jew  no  less  than  to  Gentile.  By  conceding  that  as  a people  the 
Jews  are  suffering  the  divine  displeasure,  we  do  not  admit  that  there  is 
not  still  among  them  a remnant  according  to  the  election  of  grace ; 
and  these  are  to  be  brought  unto  Christ  by  the  means  which  God  has 
appointed  for  the  salvation  of  elect  sinners,  of  whatever  race  or 
tongue.  W e look  for  no  special  dispensation  on  behalf  of  the  Jews. 
We  believe  in  no  new  kingdom  of  grace,  differing  for  the  Jews  from 
the  old  kingdom  eff  grace,  of  which  the  apostles,  the  martyrs,  and  the 
saints  of  every  age  and  nation  have  been  the  willing  subjects. 

And  yet  our  missions  among  the  Jews  should  be  carried  forward 
under  the  encouragement  afforded  by  the  promise,  that  with  the  ful- 
ness of  the  Gentiles  all  Israel  shall  be  saved.  Their  dispersion  over 
the  face  of  the  earth,  moreover,  imparts  special  interest  to  our 
missionary  labors  among  them.  They  are  found  everywhere,  bound 
together  by  a common  chord,  so  that  a blow  struck  against  them  in 
Damascus  vibrates  through  the  whole  body,  and  is  deeply  felt  in  New 
York,  London,  Berlin,  or  Calcutta.  They  are  in  important  respects 
like  the  natives  of  the  countries  where  they  sojourn.  In  Germany,  they 
speak  German  ; in  Persia,  they  speak  Persian  ; in  short,  they  are  com- 
monly acquainted  with  the  vernacular  tongue  of  the  people  amongst 
whom  they  dwell,  and  also  with  the  customs,  mode  of  life,  and  ways  of 
the  country.  Let  the  Jews  then  become  converted  to  Christ,  and  in 
every  land  they  will  be  ready  to  preach  the  faith  which  now  they  deny. 
Planted  by  Providence  in  all  lands,  qualified  by  language  and  expe- 
rience to  enter  without  delay  on  the  work  of  evangelization,  they 


| name  amongst  all  nations. 


XX. 

THE  UNEYANGELIZED  NATIONS. 

“Were  remafnetj)  a>et  berj)  much  lantr  to  be  possesses.” 


A map  of  the  world,  painted  in  light  or  dark  colors,  according  to  the 
prevalence  or  absence  of  the  knowledge  of  God,  presents  a picture 
deeply  shaded.  It  is  indeed  a picture  to  affect,  deeply  every  Christian 
heart.  The  darkness  spreads  over  a larger  extent  of  the  earth  than  the 
light ; even  the  light  in  many  broad  regions  is  not  the  pure  rays  of  the 
sun,  but  is  darkened  by  the  atmosphere  of  Mecca  or  of  Rome. 

Amongst  some  of  the  gloomiest  parts  of  the  earth,  the  Church  of 
Christ  has  now  her  missionaries,  laboring  to  spread  abroad  the  light 
of  the  gospel.  In  another  chapter,  a general  view  of  missionary  statis- 
tics will  be  given ; in  this,  an  attempt  will  be  made  to  enumerate  most 
of  the  tribes  and  nations  for  whom  the  Protestant  Church  has  not  yet 
entered  upon  the  work  of  missions,  or  has  engaged  in  this  work  to  a 
very  limited  extent. 

Beginning  with  our  own  continent,  and  with  our  nearest  heathen 
neighbors,  we  find  numerous  tribes  of  Indians,  amongst  whom  no  mis- 
sionary efforts  have  been  commenced.  If  the  reader  will  refer  to  Map 
No.  III.*  he  will  find  the  districts  occupied  by  the  more  important  of 
these  tribes. 

* This  map  has  been  reduced  from  Captain  Eastman’s  map,  in  the  Third  Part  of  the 
“ History  ...  of  the  Indian  Tribes  in  the  United  States,  by  H.  E.  Schoolcraft,  LL.D. 
Published  under  direction  of  the  Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs.”  A few  corrections 
have  been  made  in  it.  Captain  Eastman’s  map  was  compiled  in  1852 ; and  it  may  be 
taken  as  the  most  satisfactory  view  of  the  location  of  the  Indian  Tribes  that  has  yet  been 
published. 


It  is  difficult  to  obtain  accurate  statistics  of  the  numbers  of  the 
Indians,  but  from  the  estimates  published  in  Dr.  Schoolcraft’s  work, 
which  are  the  returns  made  by  agents  and  others  to  the  Indian  Depart- 


ment, we  take  the  following  particulars  : 

Indians  in  Oregon  : Estimate  in  1851,  - 6,500 

“ “ Flat-heads,  Snakes,  and  others,  not 

included  above,  - 16,000 

Indians  in  California,  North-western  tribes : Estimate  in 

1851, 9,080 

“ “ In  other  parts  of  the  State,  - - 90,000 

Indians  in  Utah,  - 12,000 

Indians  in  New-Mexico,  Pueblos  : Estimate  in  1851,  - 18,717 

“ “ Apaches,  Navajos,  etc.,  - - 27,000 

Indians  in  Texas,  Comanches : Estimate  in  1851  of  the 
Indian  Agent,  and  regarded  by 
him  as  exaggerated,  - 20,000 

“ “ Other  tribes,  same  estimate,  - - 2,500 

Cheyennes, 3,000 

Dacotahs  or  Sioux  bands,  having  no  missionaries — 

Brulle,  Yancton,  Two-Kettle,  Yanctonais,  etc.,  - 15,640 

Aricarees, 1,500 

Mandans,  ' 150 

Gros  Yentres, 700 

61 


MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


8,000 

4,800 

10,800 

246,387* 


Assinoboins, 

Crows,  of  twelve  small  bands,  one  of  which,  the  Root- 
Diggers,  was  originally  a band  of  Snake  Indians, 
Blackfeet, 


Some  of  the  Indian  tribes  in  British,  and  all  in  Russian 
America,  are  in  like  manner  without  the  means  of  grace,  as 
are  the  Indians  of  Mexico  and  South  America,  who  are 
mostly  under  the  influence  of  Roman  Catholic  priests.  It 
is  not  practicable  to  form  a reliable  estimate  of  the  num- 
bers of  the  British,  Russian,  and  Spanish  American  In- 
dians. The  Indians  in  Patagonia  and  the  adjacent  islands 
have  been  estimated  at  120,000.  The  Indians  in  Spanish 
American  States  are  included  in  the  returns  of  the  inhabits 
ants  of  those  countries. 

Leaving  the  Aborigines,  we  turn  to  the  large  Roman 
Catholic  population,  extending  from  Mexico  to  Patagonia. 
Some  Protestant  ministers  occupy  points  far  distant  from 
each  other,  and  are  laboring  mostly  amongst  English  and 
American  residents  and  sailors,  though  they  may  exert 
some  influence  indirectly  on  the  native  inhabitants;  their 
number  does  not  probably  reach  half  a score.  We  must 
enumerate,  as  destitute  of  missionaries  : 


* The  Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs,  in  the  Beport  of  December,  1853,  estimates  the 
number  of  Indians  east  of  the  Mississippi  at  18,000 ; and  in  Minnesota,  and  along  the 
frontiers  of  the  States  to  Texas,  including  the  Indian  Territory,  at  110,000.  Most  of 
these  have  missionary  agencies  amongst  them,  though  often  of  a most  imperfect  and 
limited  kind.  The  same  officer  estimates  the  whole  number  of  Indians  in  the  States 
and  Territories  at  400,000.  The  returns  here  given  amount  in  all  to  about  875,000,  viz.: 
Tribes  enumerated  above,  as  without  missionaries,  -----  246,387 

Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs’  Estimate,  for  the  States  east  of  the  Missis- 
sippi, and  the  frontiers,  - --  --  --  --  - 128,000 


374387 


Jews  form  a considerable  part  of  this  pop- 
ulation, amongst  whom  there  are  two  mis- 
sionaries. The  rest  are  Mohammedans, 
excepting  the  French  in  Algiers,  some 
80,000.] 


Mexico,  - - - - 

_ 

7,138,000 

Central  America, 

- 

2,146,000 

New  Granada,  - - - 

- 

1,686,000 

Venezuela,  - 

- 

1,000,000 

Equador,  - 

- 

600,000 

Bolivia,  - 

- 

1,030,000 

Peru, 

- 

1,400,000 

Chili,  - 

- 

1,200,000 

Buenos  Ayres,  - 

- 

1,600,000 

Uruguay,  - - - - 

- 

250,000 

Paraguay, 

- 

270,000 

Brazil,  - 

- 

7,000,000 

In  the  West  Indies  : 

Hayti,*  - 

- 

900,000 

Cuba,  Spanish,  - - - 

- 

1,007,000 

Porto  Rico,  Spanish, 

- 

359,000 

Guadaloupe,  French, 

- 

127,000 

Martinique,  French,  - 

- 

118,000 

Guiana,  (on  the  Continent,) 

French,  - 

21,000 

Crossing  over  to  Africa,  we  find  no  mis- 
onaries,  except  as  noted  in — 

Morocco,  - - - - 

- 

8,500,000 

Algiers,  - - - - 

- 

2,808,000 

Tunis,  - 

- 

2,220,000 

Tripoli  and  Barca,  - 

- 

800,000 

Beled  el  Jerid,  - - - 

- 

900,000 

[These  are  the  Barbary  States,  and  the 

25,320,000 


2,532,000 


* There  are  small  English  Baptist  and  Wesleyan  missions  in  Hayti. 


THE  UNEVANGELIZED  NATIONS. 

63 

Egypt,* 

2,895,000 

In  the  Asiatic,  Australasian,  and  Poly- 

Nubia, 

500,000 

nesian  Islands,  a large  population  remains 

The  Great  Desert,  - 

300,000 

in  spiritual  darkness.  Our  information  of 

Soudan, 

10,000,000 

many  of  these  islands  is  very  limited,  but 

Borgoo,  Darfour,  &c.,  ... 

1,200,000 

we  may  specify  as  without  missions — 

Abyssinia, 

3,000,000 

The  Philippines,  - 

3,000,000 

Eastern  Africa, f - 

3,000,000 

Sumatra,  ------ 

3,000,000 

Ethiopia, 

3,000,000 

Molucca  and  Spice  Islands, 

1,000,000 

African  Islands,  Madagascar,  &c., 

5,100,000 

New  Guinea,  New  Caledonia,  &c.,  - 

600,000 

To  these  may  be  added  several  countries 

Pelew,  Ladrone,  and  others, 

100,000 

in  which  the  missionary  force  yet  em- 
ployed is  very  limited,  viz  : 

Senegambia, 

7,000,000 

To  these  may  be  added,  as  supplied  with 
but  a very  limited  missionary  agency, — 

J ava, 

9,530,000 

Upper  Guinea, 

5,500,000 

Borneo, 

3,000,000 

Lower  Guinea, 

4,500,000 

Celebes, 

2,000,000 

Proceeding  to  Asia,  we  may  enumerate — 
Asiatic  Russia,  including  Georgia,  &c., 

61,223,000 

4,562,000 

To  this  long  list  of  nations  and  tribes 
to  whom  the  gospel  has  not  yet  been 

22,230,000 

Independent  Turkey, 

6,500,000 

preached,  we  must  add  the  Greek  and 

Arabia, 

8,000,000 

Roman  Catholic  nations  in  Europe.  The 

Persia, 

9,000,000 

population  of  Russia  in  Europe,  most  of 

Afghanistan, 

6,000,000 

Austria  and  of  several  German  States, 

Belochistan,  ----- 

1,500,000 

Italy,  Greece,  Spain,  Portugal,  France, 

Anam,  or  Cochin  China  and  Cambodia, 

9,000,000 

Belgium,  and  the  larger  part  of  Ireland 

Japan,  ------ 

30,000,000 

is,  either  wholly  or  in  great  part,  under 

To  these  should  be  added  many  districts 
in  India,  not  having  a missionary  station, 

50,000,000 

bondage  to  the  Pope  and  the  Patriarch 
or  Emperor.  To  a large  extent  the  in- 
habitants of  these  nations  are  inacces- 

And  nearly  all  of  the  Chinese  Empire, 
including  Thibet,  Chinese  Tartary,  &c., 
missions  being  formed  only  at  six  places 
on  the  Southern  Coast,  - - - 300,000,000 

sible  to  the  Christian  missionary,  though 
amongst  some  of  them  the  door  is  now 
open.  Changes  are  in  rapid  progress, 
and  we  may  hope  that  many  years  will 

424,562,000 

* There  is  a missionary  at  Cairo  amongst  the  Copts,  and  two  missionaries  amongst 
the  Jews  at  Tanglers  and  Tunis. 

t There  axe  two  or  three  missionaries  at  Momhas,  on  the  Eastorn  coast. 

not  pass  away  before  the  gospel  shall 
be  freely  published  in  these  lands.  This 
Greek  and  Papal  population  we  may 
estimate  at  185,000,000. 

| 

64 


MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


A general  summary  of  the  preceding-  statistics  is  as  follows  : 
Indians  in  the  United  States  and  Territories,-  - 246,000 

“ British  and  Russian  Territories,  - 100,000 

“ Patagonia  and  islands,  - 120,000 

Spanish  American  States, 25,320,000 

West  Indies,  - - - - - - 2,532,000 

Africa, 61,223,000 

Asia, 424,562,000 


Islands  in  the  China  Sea  and  Pacific  Ocean, 
Greeks  and  Roman  Catholics  in  Europe, 


22,230,000 

185,000,000 

721,333,000 


If  the  Chinese  census  of  360,000,000  be  received  as  correct,  the 
whole  population  of  the  earth  may  be  estimated  at  not  less  than  one 
thousand  millions.  According  to  the  preceding  statistics,  therefore, 
nearly  three-fourths  of  the  human  family  live  in  regions  that  are  des- 


titute of  evangelical  preaching.  A still  larger  number  are  in  bondage 
to  false  religious  systems,  as  is  shown  by  the  following  Tables  :* 


RELIGIONS  OF  MANKIND. 


Paganism, 
Mohammedanism, 
Judaism,  - 
Christianity, 


CHRISTIANS. 


Protestant,  - - - 

Armenian,  Nestorian,  &c., 
Greek,  - - - - 

Romanist, 


600,000,000 

120,000,000 

5,000,000 

275.000. 000 

1,000,000,000 

85.000. 000 

5,000,000 

50.000. 000 

135.000. 000 


275,000,000 

* These  figures  can  he  regarded  only  as  general  Estimates,  and  not  as  exact  Eeturns. 


X 

A GENERAL  YIEf  OE  PROTESTANT  MISSIONS. 


“ Sdl  tl)c»  gatijer  tDemselbes  together,  tlje»  come  to  ffitiee.” 


While  darkness  rests  upon  many  nations,  there  are  signs  of  approach- 
ing day.  The  last  chapter  contained  statistics  of  tribes  and  people  in 
a great  measure  destitute  of  missionary  agency  ; in  this,  some  general 
statistics  will  be  given  of  Protestant  missions  in  unevangelized  coun- 
tries. These  must  be  brief  and  imperfect,  yet  they  will  serve  to  show 
that  a good  work  is  in  progress — a work  which,  we  believe,  God  will 
bless  more  and  more,  until  “ the  earth  shall  be  full  of  the  knowledge 
of  the  Lord  as  the  waters  cover  the  sea.” 

The  returns  made  out  by  Missionary  Societies  are  not  prepared  on 
the  same  plan.  Some  enumerate  only  the  male  laborers,  others  include 
the  female.  The  common  but  not  invariable  usage  of  the  American 
Societies  is  to  report  the  wives  of  ministers  as  assistant  missionaries,  as 
no  doubt  they  are  in  a high  degree,  but  this  is  seldom  done  by  Euro- 
pean Societies.  Some  enumerate  missionaries  and  assistant  mission- 
aries, without  distinguishing  the  number  of  each  class.  Some  report 
as  missionaries  all  who  are  in  the  service  of  the  Society,  though  the 
labors  of  many  are  devoted  to  their  own  countrymen,  and  they  might 
properly  be  classed  as  domestic  missionaries.  In  the  following  returns, 
an  enumeration  is  attempted  of  those  only  who  are  laboring  among 
people  to  whom  the  gospel  has  not  been  preached.  Again,  the  views 
of  missionaries  are  not  uniform  as  to  the  admission  of  communicants 
to  the  Lord's  Table.  And  in  some  instances,  no  returns  of  communi- 
cants and  scholars  are  given.  These  and  other  causes  must  prevent 


any  complete  enumeration  of  missionary  statistics.  The  details  given 
in  this  chapter  can  be  regarded  only  as  conveying  a general  idea  of  the 
missionary  work. 

They  have  been  taken  from  the  Annual  Reports  of  the  following 
Societies,  viz. : American  Board  of  Foreign  Missions,  Boston ; Ame- 
rican Indian  Mission  Association,  Louisville ; American  Missionary 
Association,  New  York;  American  Christian  Union,  New  York; 
Baptist  Missionary  Union,  Boston  ; Baptist  Southern  Board  of 
Foreign  Missions,  Richmond  ; Episcopal  Board  of  Foreign  Missions, 
New  York  ; Missionary  Society  of  the  Methodist  Episcopal  Church, 
North,  New  York ; Missionary  Society  of  the  Methodist  Episcopal 
Church,  South,  Louisville  ; Board  of  Foreign  Missions  of  the  Presby- 
terian Church,  New  York ; Baptist,  Church,  Gospel  Propagation, 
London,  and  Wesleyan  Missionary  Societies,  London — all  of  the  year 
1853,  except  the  Presbyterian  Board  and  the  Methodist  Society,  South, 
which  are  of  1854 ; Missionary  Register,  London,  1853-4,  and  a few 
other  sources.  No  attempt  has  been  made  to  collect  the  statistics  of 
English  and  American  missions  among  the  Roman  Catholic  populations 
of  Europe,  nor  of  the  missions  to  the  Jews  in  Europe.  A complete 
enumeration  of  these  would  include  in  France,  Belgium,  etc.,  as  the 
main  agency  in  the  work  of  missions,  the  Protestant  churches  of  those 
countries,  which  however  could  not  properly  be  classified  as  foreign 
missions. 

65 


MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS 


66 


Following  the  geographical  arrangement  adopted  in  the  last  chap- 
ter, this  survey  must  begin  with  missions  to 

THE  AMERICAN  INDIANS. 

American  Board  :* * * § *  among  the  Senecas  and  Tuscaroras,  Western 
New  York  ; the  Abenaquis,  Canada ; the  Ojibwas  or  Chippewas, Wis- 
consin ; the  Dacotahs  or  Sioux,  Minnesota ; and  the  Cherokees  and 
Choctaws  in  the  Indian  Territory — ordained  missionaries,  21 ; native 
preachers,  3 ; assistant  missionaries,  83, — of  whom  some  are  natives  ; 
communicants,  between  l,50u  and  2,000 ; scholars,  about  GOO. 

American  Missionary  Association  :f  among  the  Ojibwas  or  Chip- 
pewas, in  Minnesota  Territory — ordained  missionaries,  2 ; physician, 
1 ; assistant  missionaries,  16. 

Baptist  Missionary  Union  : J among  the  Ojibwas  or  Chippewas, 
and  the  Ottawas  in  Michigan,  and  the  Shawnees,  Delawares,  and  Otta- 
was  in  the  Indian  Territory — ordained  missionaries,  £ ; ‘assistant 
missionaries,  10— -some  of  whom  are  natives ; communicants,  107 ; 
scholars,  131. 

Baptist  Indian  Missionary  Association  among  the  Pottawato- 
mies,  Weas,  Creeks,  and  Choctaws,  in  the  Indian  Territory — ordained 
missionaries,  11 — of  whom  4 are  Indians ; assistant  missionaries,  14  ; 
communicants,  about  1,500 ; scholars,  — . 

Episcopal  : The  Report  of  the  Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs, 
1853,  refers  to  a church  of  this  denomination  among  the  Oneidas  in 
Michigan,  and  a mission  among  the  Chippewas  in  Minnesota— ordained 
missionary,  1 ; assistant  missionaries,  8. 

Episcopal,  English  Church  Missionary  Society  : ordained  mission- 
aries, 9 — one  of  them  a native  ; assistant  missionaries,  11 — most  of 
them  natives,  at  the  Red  River  settlement  and  nine  other  stations,  in 


*The  organ  of  the  Congregational,  New  School  Presbyterian  and  Reformed  Dutch 
Churches. 

+ The  organ  of  churches  conducting  missions  on  the  basis  of  opposition  to  slavery,  as 
in  itself  and  under  all  circumstances  sinful. 

X The  organ  of  the  regular  Baptist  churches  in  the  Northern  States. 

§ The  organ  of  Baptist  churches  in  the  Southern  States. 


the  British  possessions  north  of  Minnesota  Territory  ; communicants, 
507 ; scholars,  724. 

The  Friends,  in  the  Baltimore,  Ohio  and  Indiana  Yearly  Meetings  : 
a manual  labor  boarding-school  among  the  Shawnees  in  the  Indian 
Territory ; scholars,  20 — who  read  the  New  Testament  as  a class-book 
every  day.  Fifty  scholars  are  in  the  “ first-day  school.”  Assistant 
missionaries,  5.  See  Report,  Com.  Indian  Affairs,  1853. 

Methodist,  North  : among  the  Oneidas  and  Ottawas  in  Michigan, 
and  among  the  Wyandots,  Shawnees,  Delawares  and  Cherokees  in  the 
Indian  Territory — missionaries,  17  ; communicants,  1,051. 

Methodist,  Souih  : among  the  Kansas,  Shawnees,  Wyandots,  De-; 
lawares,  Kickapoos,  Cherokees,  Creeks,  and  Choctaws — missionaries, 
28  ; communicants,  3,518  ; scholars,  in  nine  manual  labor  schools,  490. 

Methodist,  English  Wesleyan  : among  the  Indians  in  the  Hudson’s 
Bay  Company’s  Territories — stations,  4 ; missionaries,  2 ; assistant 
missionaries,  4 ; communicants,  120 ; scholars,  74. 

Moravians  or  United  Brethren : among  the  Delawares  in  Upper 
Canada,  and  among  the  same  tribe  in  the  Indian  Territory — stations, 
2 ; among  the  Cherokees  in  the  Indian  Territory — stations,  2 ; breth- 
ren, 8 ; sisters,  7 ; “ under  instruction,”  407.  In  Greenland  and  among 
the  Esquimaux  in  Labrador — stations,  4 ; brethren,  31 ; sisters,  20  ; 
under  instruction,  3,400  ; communicants,  1,230. 

Presbyterian  : among  the  Chippewas  in  Michigan,  the  Omahas  and 
Otoes  in  Nebraska  Territory,  and  the  Iowas  and  Sacs,  the  Creeks, 
Seminoles,  Choctaws,  and  Chickasaws,  in  the  Indian  Territory — 
ordained  missionaries,  8 ; male  and  female  assistant  missionaries,  58 — 
some  of  whom  are  natives ; communicants,  85  ; scholars,  538. 

SPANISH- AMERICAN  STATES. 

American  Christian  Union  :*  at  Valparaiso — ordained  missionary, 
1 ; at  Panama — lay  missionary,  1. 

American  Seaman’s  Friend  : at  Panama — ordained  missionary,  1. 

American  Union  and  American  Seaman’s  Friend  : at  Valpa- 


*The  organ  chiefly  of  the  Congregational,  New  School  Presbyterian,  and  Reformed 
Dutch  Churches. 


A GENERAL  VIEW  OF  PROTESTANT  MISSIONS.  67 


raiso — ordained  missionary,  1 ; at  Rio  do  J aneiro — ordained  mission- 
ary, 1. 

Methodist,  North  : at  Buenos  Ayres — ordained  missionary,  1. 

Methodist,  English  Wesleyan  : at  Belize  and  Caribtown,  Honduras 
Bay — missionaries,  2 ; communicants,  503  ; scholars,  326. 

Moravian  : in  Nicaragua,  or  the  Mosquito  Coast — brethren,  3 ; 
sister,  1. 

Presbyterian  : at  Buenos  Ayres — ordained  missionary,  1. 

GUIANA  AND  THE  WEST  INDIES. 

American  Association  : in  Jamaica — ordained  missionaries,  6 ; 
male  and  female  assistant  missionaries,  17  ; communicants,  about  300  ; 
scholars,  513. 

American  Union  : in  Hayti — -ordained  missionary,  1. 

Baptist,  English  : in  Hayti,  Trinidad,  and  the  Bahamas — mission- 
aries, 7 ; native  preachers,  24 ; native  assistant  teachers,  201 ; com- 
municants, 2,656  ; scholars,  753 ; Sabbath-school  scholars,  2039.  The 
churches  in  Jamaica,  not  now  assisted  by  the  Society,  report  15,353 
communicants. 

Episcopal,  English  Church  Missionary  Society  : in  British  Guiana 
— ordained  missionary,  1 ; assistant  missionaries,  2 ; communicants,  72  ; 
scholars,  102. 

Episcopal,  English  Gospel  Propagation  Society  : in  Jamaica,  the 
Bahamas,  Antigua,  Barbadoes,  and  British  Guiana — ordained  mission- 
aries, 33. 

Independent,  London  Missionary  Society  : in  British  Guiana  and 
Jamaica — ordained  missionaries,  18  ; native  assistants,  11 ; commu- 
nicants, about  4,000 ; scholars,  3,000. 

Methodist,  English  Wesleyan : in  British  Guiana,  Antigua,  St. 
Christopher’s,  Dominica,  Montserrat,  Nevis,  St.  Eustatius,  St.  Bar- 
tholomew’s, St.  Martin’s,  Tortola,  Anegada,  Anguilla,  St.  Vincent’s, 
Trinidad,  Tobago,  Barbadoes,  Jamaica,  the  Bahamas,  and  Hayti — • 
missionaries  and  assistant  missionaries,  84;  communicants,  48,144; 
scholars  in  day-schools,  about  9,500. 

Moravian  : in  the  islands  of  St.  Thomas,  St.  John,  St.  Croix, 
Jamaica,  Antigua,  St.  Christopher’s  or  St.  Kitts,  Barbadoes,  Tobago, 


and  in  Surinam  or  Dutch  Guiana — in  1852,  brethren,  87 ; sisters, 
76  ; under  instruction,  59,596,  of  whom  about  17,000  were  communi- 
cants. 

Presbyterian,  Scotch  United  Secession  Church  : in  Jamaica  and 
Trinidad — ordained  missionaries,  23  ; communicants,  3,900  ; scholars, 
about  3,000. 

AFRICA— NORTH  AND  EAST. 

Episcopal,  English  Church  Missionary  Society  : at  Cairo,  Egypt — 
ordained  missionary,  1 ; teachers,  4,  three  of  whom  are  natives  ; at 
Rabbai  Mpi,  (Mombas,)  a few  degrees  south  of  the  equator — ordained 
missionaries,  3.  London  Jews’  Society  : at  Tanjiers — ordained  mis- 
sionary, 1. 

Independent,  British  Jews’  Society  : at  Tunis — missionary,  1 ; 
assistant,  1. 

AFRICA— WEST. 

American  Board  : Gaboon  river,  near  the  equator — stations,  3 ; 
ordained  missionaries,  6 ; physician,  1 ; female  assistant  missionaries,  7 ; 
native  helpers,  4 ; communicants,  about  20 ; scholars,  50. 

American  Association  ; among  the  Mendians,  near  Sierra  Leone — 
ordained  missionaries,  3 ; male  and  female  assistant  missionaries,  14. 

Baptist,  Missionary  Union  : among  the  Bassas,  in  Liberia — ordained 
missionaries,  2 ; female  assistant  missionaries,  4 ; communicants,  16  ; 
scholars,  46  ; in  Sunday-school,  60. 

Baptist,  Southern  Board : in  Liberia  at  Cape  Palmas,  Sinoe, 
Monrovia,  and  ten  other  stations — missionaries  and  teachers,  19  ; com- 
municants, about  600  ; scholars,  about  400 ; in  the  Yoruba  country, 
missionaries,  4. 

Baptist,  English : on  the  island  of  Fernando  Po,  and  at  one  or  two 
stations  on  the  coast  of  the  mainland — missionary,  1 ; assistant  mission- 
aries, 4 ; native  assistant,- 1 ; communicants,  122  ; scholars,  280. 

Episcopal  : at  Cape  Palmas  and  neighboring  places — ordained  mis- 
sionaries, 12  ; physician,  1 ; male  and  female  assistant  missionaries,  17  ; 
native  teachers,  2. 

Episcopal,  English  Church  Missionary  Society : in  Sierra  Leone, 
the  Timneh  country  at  a station  sixty  miles  east  of  Freetown,  and  in 


MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


68 


theYoruba  country  at  Abbeokuta,  Badagry,and  other  places — ordained 
missionaries,  27,  of  whom  4 are  natives ; assistant  missionaries,  87, 
nearly  all  natives  ; communicants,  2,976  ; scholars,  5,822. 

German  : Basle  Society,  at  Akropong  and  Danish  Accra — Ham- 
burgh Society,  at  Cape  Coast — missionaries,  3 ; church  members,  20  ; 
scholars,  220. 

Methodist,  North  : in  Liberia — missionaries,  20  ; teachers,  20  ; 
communicants,  1,301,  of  whom  115  are  natives;  scholars  in  the 
academy,  boarding  and  day-schools,  811,  of  whom  127  are  natives. 
Two  of  the  teachers  are  white  persons.  The  missionaries  include  all 
the  ministers  in  charge  of  congregations  of  the  Methodist  Church, 
North,  in  Liberia. 

Methodist,  English  Wesleyan  : on  the  Gambia  river,  Sierra  Leone, 
Gold  Coast,  and  Kingdom  of  Ashantee — missionaries  and  assistant 
missionaries,  17  ; communicants,  8,021 ; scholars,  4,320. 

Presbyterian  : in  Liberia,  and  on  the  island  of  Corisco — ordained 
missionaries,  6 ; licentiate  preacher,  1 ; teachers,  2 — of  whom  one  mis- 
sionary, the  licentiate,  and  the  teachers,  are  colored  persons  : church 
members,  about  120  ; scholars,  about  150. 

Presbyterian,  Scotch  United  Secession  Church  : at  Old  Calabar, 
100  miles  east  of  the  Delta  of  the  Niger,  three  stations,  one  of  which  is 
70  miles  from  the  sea — ordained  missionaries,  4 ; male  and  female 
assistant  missionaries,  6 ; native  assistants,  6. 

AFRICA— SOUTH. 

American  Board:  among  the  Zulus — ordained  missionaries,  13; 
assistant  missionary,  1 ; female  assistant  missionaries,  15  ; native  help- 
ers, 9 ; communicants,  164  ; scholars,  155. 

Episcopal,  English  Gospel  Propagation  Society : among  the  heathen 
and  Mohammedans  at  Cape  Town,  and  at  Natal — ordained  missionaries, 

2 ; catechists,  2 ; agriculturist,  1 ; in  a school  among  the  Hottentots  in 
George  District,  140  scholars. 

French  Protestant  : among  the  Hottentots,  Bassouto  Bechuanas, 
and  the  Bechuanas — ordained  missionaries,  15  ; assistant  missionaries, 

3 ; communicants,  855  ; scholars,  360. 


German  Protestant  : Rhenish  Missionary  Society — missionaries, 
22  ; assistants  and  native  catechists,  8 ; communicants,  1,239  ; scho- 
lars, 620.  Berlin  Missionary  Society — missionaries,  14;  “baptized,” 
907 ; scholars,  418. 

Independent,  London  Missionary  Society  : among  the  Hottentots, 
Caffres,  Bosjesmans,  and  Bechuanas — ordained  missionaries,  24  ; assist- 
ant missionaries,  3 ; communicants,  3,747 ; scholars,  3,387.  In  Mau- 
ritius— ordained  missionaries,  3. 

Methodist,  English  Wesleyan : in  the  colony,  and  in  Caflraria — 
missionaries  and  assistant  missionaries,  39  ; communicants,  of  whom 
however  a large  number  are  colonists,  about  5,000 ; scholars,  about 
7,400. 

Moravians  : among  the  Hottentots  and  Caffres — brethren,  27  ; sis- 
ters, 24 ; “ under  care,”  6,560. 

Norwegian  Protestant:  near  Port  Natal — missionaries,  4. 

Presbyterian,  Scotch  Free  Church : at  Cape  Town  and  in  Caf- 
fraria — ordained  missionaries,  6 ; communicants,  88.  United  Secession 
Church : in  Caffraria — ordained  missionaries,  2 ; communicants,  about 
100. 

ASIA— WESTERN  AND  ADJACENT  PARTS  OF  EUROPE. 

American  Board  : among  the  Armenians  of  Constantinople,  Smyrna, 
and  six  other  places — ordained  missionaries,  21 ; female  assistant  mis- 
sionaries, 25  ; native  preachers,  10  ; native  helpers,  36  ; communicants, 
351 ; scholars,  451 : among  the  Jews,  at  Constantinople  and  Salonica 
— ordained  missionaries,  4 ; female  assistant  missionaries,  3 ; native 
helpers,  2.  In  Greece,  one  ordained  missionary  and  his  wife.  In  Syria, 
at  Beirut  and  four  other  places — ordained  missionaries,  11 ; physician, 

1 ; printer,  1 ; female  assistant  missionaries,  13  ; native  preachers,  4; 
native  helper,  1 ; communicants,  — ; scholars,  554.  In  Assyria,  at 
Mosul  and  Diarbekir — ordained  missionaries,  5 ; female  assistant  mis- 
sionaries, 5 ; native  helpers,  3 ; communicants,  10 ; scholars,  41. 
Among  the  Nestorians,  at  Ooroomiah  and  Gawar — ordained  mission- 
aries, 8 ; printer,  1 ; female  assistant  missionaries,  11  ; native  preach- 
ers, 11  ; native  helpers,  12  ; communicants,  — ; scholars,  about  1,200. 

Baptist,  Missionary  Union : in  Greece,  at  Athens,  Corfu,  and  Pi- 


A GENERAL  VIEW  OF  PROTESTANT  MISSIONS. 


raeus — ordained  missionaries,  2 ; female  assistant  missionaries,  3 ; native 
assistant,  1 ; communicants,  13  ; scholars,  50. 

Episcopal  : at  Athens — ordained  missionary,  1 ; female  assistant 
missionaries,  2. 

Episcopal,  English  Church  Missionary  Society  : at  Syra  in  Greece, 
Smyrna  in  Asia  Minor,  Jerusalem  and  Nazareth — ordained  mission- 
aries, 4 ; assistant  missionaries,  3 ; native  assistants,  8 ; communicants, 
6 ; scholars,  361.  London  Jews’  Society : at  Smyrna,  Constantinople, 
Jassy,  Bucharest,  Jerusalem,  Jaffa,  Safet,  and  Bagdad — ordained  mis- 
sionaries, 9 ; assistants  and  colporteurs,  17  ; communicants,  — ; scho- 
lars, 124. 

Independent,  British  Jews’  Society  : at  Beirut — ordained  mission- 
ary, 1 ; scholars,  30. 

Presbyterian,  Associate  Reformed : at  Damascus,  Syria,  among  the 
Jews — ordained  missionaries,  2 ; physician,  1. 

Presbyterian,  Irish  General  Assembly  : at  Damascus,  among  the 
Jews — ordained  missionaries,  2. 

Presbyterian,  Scotch  Free  Church  : at  Constantinople,  among  the 
Jews — ordained  missionaries,  3. 

ASIA— INDIA  AND  CEYLON. 

American  Board  : in  Ceylon,  South  and  West  India— ordained  mis- 
sionaries, 39  ; assistant  missionaries,  4 ; female  assistant  missionaries, 
34;  native  preachers,  4;  native  helpers,  110;  communicants,  884; 
scholars,  6,787. 

Baptist,  Missionary  Union : in  Assam  and  among  the  Teloogoos, 
South  India — ordained  missionaries,  9 ; female  assistant  missionaries, 
9 ; native  assistants,  7. 

Baptist,  Free-Will : in  Orissa — ordained  missionaries,  3 ; native 
assistants,  4 ; communicants,  26 ; scholars,  67. 

Baptist,  English  General : in  Orissa — missionaries,  5 ; assistant 
missionary,  1 ; native  preachers,  9 ; communicants,  255. 

Baptist,  English  : in  Bengal  and  other  parts  of  North  India,  South 
India,  and  Ceylon— missionaries,  33 ; native  preachers,  103 ; native 
communicants,  1,656  ; scholars,  3,492. 

Episcopal,  English  Church  Missionary  Society : in  north,  west,  and 


69 


south  Iudia  and  Ceylon — ordained  missionaries,  100 — of  whom  17  are 
natives  and  East  Indians ; male  assistant  missionaries,  16  ; female  assist- 
ant missionaries,  9 ; native  helpers— male,  986  ; female,  158  ; commu- 
nicants, 6,182  ; scholars,  34,036. 

Episcopal,  English  Gospel  Propagation  Society  : in  north  and 
south  India  and  Ceylon — ordained  missionaries,  48 — of  whom  6 appear 
by  their  names  to  be  natives ; “ country-born  ” and  native  catechists, 
166  ; communicants,  4,629 ; scholars,  about  4,000  boys,  and  1,500 
girls. 

German  Protestant  : Basle  Missionary  Society  in  south-western 
India — missionaries,  28 — of  whom  one  is  a native  ; European  assistant 
missionaries,  3 ; native  catechists,  39 ; communicants,  599 ; scholars, 
1,687  boys,  and  363  girls.  Gosner’s  Missionary  Society,  in  north  India 
— missionaries,  26  ; scholars,  350.  Missionary  Society  at  Leipsic,  in 
north  India — missionaries,  7 ; communicants,  1,580  ; scholars,  874. 

Independent,  London  Missionary  Society : in  north,  west  and  south 
India — ordained  missionaries,  44 — of  whom  two  are  natives ; assistant 
missionaries,  3 ; communicants,  about  1,400  ; scholars,  about  9,000. 

Methodist,  English  Wesleyan:  in  south  India  and  Ceylon — mis- 
sionaries and  assistants,  37 ; native  catechists,  18  ; communicants, 
2,137 ; scholars,  4,936. 

Presbyterian  : in  the  north-west  or  Upper  India — ordained  mis- 
sionaries, 24 — two  of  whom  are  natives  ; female  assistant  missionaries, 
21 ; native  assistants,  25  ; communicants,  260  ; scholars,  2,900. 

Presbyterian,  Irish  General  Assembly  : in  Guzerat,  western  India 
— ordained  missionaries,  5. 

Presbyterian,  Scotch  Free  Church  : at  Calcutta,  Madras,  Bombay, 
and  other  places — ordained  missionaries,  18— of  whom  three  are  na- 
tives ; native  preachers,  4 ; scholars,  7,030. 

Presbyterian,  Scotch,  Established  Church : at  Calcutta,  Bombay, 
and  Madras — ordained  missionaries,  7 ; female  assistant  missionaries, 
2 ; native  catechist,  1 ; scholars,  2,375. 

ASIA— BURMAH  AND  SIAM. 

American  Association  : in  Siam — ordained  missionaries,  5 ; female 
assistant  missionaries,  5. 


70  MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


Baptist,  Missionary  Union : in  Bui-mak — missionaries,  29 ; female 
assistant  missionaries,  31 ; native  assistants,  129  ; communicants,  about 
7,000 ; scholars,  1,062.  In  Siam — missionaries,  3 ; female  assistant 
missionaries,  4 ; Chinese  assistants,  3 ; communicants,  35. 

Presbyterian  : in  Siam — missionaries,  2 ; physician  and  licentiate 
preacher,  1 ; female  assistant  missionary,  1. 

ASIA— CHINA. 

American  Board  : at  Canton,  Amoy  and  Fuh-Chau — missionaries, 
11 ; licentiate  preacher,  1 ; printer,  1 ; female  assistant  missionaries, 
13  ; native  helpers,  4 ; communicants,  21 ; scholars,  about  100. 

American  Association  : Chinese  in  California — missionary,  1. 

Baptist,  Missionary  Union  : at  Hong-Kong  and  Ningpo — mission- 
aries, 5 ; female  assistant  missionaries,  3 ; native  assistants,  6 ; com- 
municants, 31 ; scholars,  65. 

Baptist,  Southern  Board  : Canton  and  Shanghai — -missionaries,  5 ; 
physician,  1 ; female  assistant  missionaries,  7 ; scholars,  80. 

Episcopal  : at  Shanghai — missionaries,  5 ; assistant  missionaries, 
7 ; native  catechists,  2 ; communicants,  24 ; scholars,  200. 

Episcopal,  English  Church  Missionary  Society : at  Fuh-Chau, 
Shanghai,  and  Ningpo — missionaries,  6 ; native  helper,  1 ; communi- 
cants, — ; scholars,  62. 

German  : Basle  Society,  at  Hong  Kong — missionaries,  3 ; native 
catechists,  5 ; communicants,  90.  Swedish  Society,  at  Hong  Kong — 
missionary,  1. 

Independent,  London  Missionary  Society : at  Canton,  Hong  Kong, 
Amoy  and  Shanghai — missionaries,  9 ; physicians,  3 ; printer,  1 ; com- 
municants, 35  ; scholars,  90. 

Methodist,  North  : at  Full  Chau— missionaries,  2 ; female  assistant 
missionaries,  2. 

Methodist,  South  : at  Shanghai — missionaries,  6. 

Methodist,  English  Wesleyan : at  Canton — missionaries,  3 ; teach- 
er, 1. 

Presbyterian  : at  Canton,  Shanghai,  and  Ningpo — missionaries, 
12  ; physicians,  2 ; female  assistant  missionaries,  13  ; native  assistant, 
1 ; communicants,  23  ; scholars,  146.  Chinese  in  California — mission- 


ary, 1 ; female  assistant  missionary,  1 ; native  catechist,  1 ; communi- 
cants, 4. 

Presbyterian,  English : at  Amoy — missionaries,  2 ; physician,  1. 

ISLANDS— CHINA  SEA  AND  PACIFIC. 

American  Board  : on  two  of  the  Caroline  Islands,  sometimes  called 
Mikronesia — missionaries,  2 ; female  assistant  missionaries,  2 ; native 
helpers,  2.  On  the  Sandwich  Islands,  pastors  and  preachers,  24  ; native 
pastors,  4 ; missionaries  supported  in  part  by  the  Board,  13 ; mission- 
aries supported  by  the  Board,  3 ; male  and  female  assistant  missiona- 
ries, 27  ; communicants,  22,236  ; scholars,  11,900.  On  the  Marquesas 
Islands,  two  native  pastors  and  several  assistants,  from  the  Sandwich 
Islands. 

Episcopal,  English  Church  Missionary  Society : in  New  Zealand — 
missionaries,  28 ; male  and  female  assistant  missionaries,  10 ; native 
assistants,  440  ; communicants,  7,027 ; scholars,  about  14,000. 

Episcopal,  English  Gospel  Propagation  Society : in  Borneo — 
missionaries,  3 ; lay  assistant  missionary,  1. 

German  : Rhenish  Society,  on  Borneo — missionaries,  5 ; printer,  1 ; 
native  catechists,  2 ; communicants,  68 ; scholars,  550.  Gosner’s  So- 
ciety, in  Java — missionaries,  3 ; in  Australia — missionaries,  14  ; and 
in  New  Zealand — -missionaries,  5.  Netherlands’  Missionary  Society, 
on  Amboyna,  Celebes,  Java,  and  Samarang — missionaries,  19  ; scho- 
lars, about  10,000.  Moravians,  in  Australia — brethren,  2 ; assistant 
brethren,  2.  Missionary  Society  at  Bremen  : in  New  Zealand — mis- 
sionaries, 5. 

Independent,  London  Missionary  Society : the  Georgian,  Society, 
Hervey,  and  Samoan  Islands — missionaries,  30  ; printer,  1 ; communi- 
cants, about  3,500 ; scholars,  about  5,000.  On  seven  of  the  Western 
Polynesian  Islands — only  Samoan  and  Rarotongan  laborers,  18. 

Methodist,  English  Wesleyan : in  the  Feejee  and  Friendly  Islands 
—missionaries  and  assistants,  23  ; native  catechists,  68 ; communicants, 
9,687  ; scholars,  11.996.  In  New  Zealand — missions  to  natives  and 
colonists,  not  separately  reported. 

Presbyterian  Church  of  Nova  Scotia  and  Scotch  Reformed  : in 
Aneiteum,  New  Hebrides — missionaries,  2 ; native  assistants,  3. 


A GENERAL  VIEW  O F PROTESTANT  MISSIONS. 


71 


I.  SUMMARY  VIEW  OF  PROTESTANT  MISSIONS. 


MISSION-FIELDS. 

§ 

g 

< 

O 

29 

2 

ASSISTANTS. 

NATIVE  HELPERS.  I 

COMMUNICANTS. 

SCHOLARS. 

American  Indians,  - - - - 

125 

259 

9,868 

2,477 

Spanish  American  States,  - - 

11 

2 

503 

326 

Guiana  and  the  West  Indies,  - 

218 

137 

236 

76,072 

16,868 

Africa — North  and  East,  - - 

6 

2 

3 

“ Western, 

107 

100 

100 

13,196 

12,138 

“ South, 

152 

72 

13 

11,193 

12,480 

Asia — Western, 

74 

87 

88 

380 

2,811 

“ India  and  Ceylon,  - - 

419 

120 

1,636 

19,651 

79,466 

“ Burmah  and  Siam,  - - 

39 

42 

132 

7,035 

1,062 

“ China, 

72 

58 

19 

237 

798 

Islands — China  Sea  and  Pacific, 

146 

55 

513 

42,518 

53,446 

Total,  - - - - 

1,369 

934 

2,737 

180,653 

181,792 

Congregational — American  Baptist,  Free-Will, 
English  Baptist, 

“ General  Baptist, 


Episcopal — American,  - 
English, 


Methodist — American,  North, 
“ South, 
English  Wesleyan, 


Moravian, 

Presbyterian — Okl  School,  Presbyterian  Board,  - 
“ “ American  Board,  - 

“ “ American  Christian  Union, 

New  School,  American  Board, 
Reformed  Dutch,  “ “ 

German  Reformed,  “ “ 

Reformed,  Presbyterian  Board, 
Associate  Reformed, 

Presbyterian  Church,  Nova  Scotia, 

English, 

French, 

German, 

Irish, 

Scotch,  Free  Church,  - 

Established  Church,  - 
United  Secession, 


II.  SUMMARY  VIEW  OF  PROTESTANT  MISSIONARIES. 


Congregational — American  Board,  - - - - 97 

London  Missionary  Society,  - 130* 

American  Baptist,  North,  - 56 

“ “ South,  - 30 


Note. — In  the  Returns  of  Societies  specifying  missionaries  and  assistants,  hut  not 
distinguishing  between  them,  one-half  is  here  assigned  to  each. 

* The  whole  number,  but  some  of  these  are  Presbyterians. 


Unknown — American  Association,  etc.,  - 


Summary — Congregational,  - 366 

Episcopal,  - - 294 

Methodist,  - - 159 

Moravian,  - - 158 

Presbyterian,  - - 365 

Unknown,  - - 27 


1,369 


3 

43 

7 

366 

19 
275 

294 

32 

20 
107 

159 

158 

53 

12 

2 

41 

7 

1 

3 

2 

2 

2 

15 

155 

7 

27 

7 

29 

365 

27 


APPENDIX 


MISSIONARIES  AMONG  THE  INDIAN  TRIBES. 


The  names  of  the  missionaries  among  the  Indian  Tribes,  in  the  Sketch  of  the  Mis- 
sions, could  not  be  given  without  changing  the  plan  on  which  that  paper  was  prepared. 
To  supply  this  deficiency  the  following  list  has  been  compiled,  which  is  taken  chiefly 
from  a valuable  series  of  papers  published  in  the  Presbyterian  newspaper  at  Cincinnati. 
In  the  other  missions  this  information  is  interwoven  with  the  narrative : 


Eev.  Wells  Bushnell  and  wife,  - 

- 

1833-35. 

Eev.  Joseph  Kerr  and  wife, 

- 

1833-37. 

Miss  Martha  Boal,  ... 

- 

1833-34. 

Miss  Nancy  Henderson, 

- 

1833-36. 

Mr.  Henry  Bradley,  - 

- 

1834-38. 

Mrs.  Bradley,  - 

- 

1837-88. 

Mr.  Elihn  M.  Shepherd, 

- 

1S34-35. 

Mr.  Francis  H.  Lindsay  and  wife, 

- 

1835-36. 

Eev.  John  Fleming,  - 

- 

1887-36. 

Mr.  James  Duncan,  - 

- 

1837-38. 

: — Mr.  Aurey  Ballard  and  wife, 

- 

1835-37. 

Mr.  Elihu  M.  Shepherd, 

- 

1835-36. 

Eev.  Samuel  M.  Irvin  and  wife, 

- 

1837 — 

Eev.  William  Hamilton  and  wife, 

- 

1837-53 

Mr.  Henry  Bradley  and  wife,  - 

- 

1838-41. 

Mrs.  Eosetta  Hardy,  - 

- 

1838-39. 

Mr.  Francis  Irvin  and  wife, 

- 

1841-47 

Eev.  Samuel  H.  Coon  and  wife,  - 

- 

1845-45. 

Mr.  Paul  Bloohm,  - 

- 

1845-47. 

Eev.  Edmund  McKinney  and  wife, 

- 

1846-47. 

Miss  Sarah  A.  Waterman,  - 

- 

1S50 

Mrs.  Letitia  Donaldson, 

- 

1853 

: — Eev.  Peter  Dougherty, 

- 

1838 — 

Mrs.  Dougherty,  ... 

- 

1840 

Eev.  John  Fleming,  - 
Mr.  Henry  Bradley  and  wife, 

Mr.  Henry  Eodli,  ... 
Mr.  Andrew  Porter,  - - - 

Mr.  James  K.  Whiteside  and  wife, 
Miss  Ann  Porter, 

Miss  H.  L.  Cowles,  ... 
Miss  W.  A.  Isbell,  ... 
Mr.  Joseph  G.  Turner  and  wife, 


1838-39. 

1841-46. 

184T 

1847 — 
1S50-52. 
1852 — 

1852 — 

1853 — 
1853 — 


Gbbeks  : — Eev.  Eobert  M.  Loughridge, 

Mrs.  Loughridge,  ... 
Eev.  Edmund  McKinney  and  wife, 
Eev.  John  Limber,  ... 
Mr  John  Lilley  and  wife,  - 
Mrs  Loughridge,  ... 
Eev.  Hamilton  Balentine,  - 
Eev.  David  W.  Eakins, 

Miss  Nancy  Thompson, 

Miss  Nancy  Hoyt,  - - - 

Mr.  William  S.  Eobertson,  - 
Mrs.  Eobertson,  - - - - 

Eev.  J.  Boss  Eamsay  and  wife,  - 
Mr.  Joseph  B.  Junkin  and  wife, 
Miss  Mary  Bowen,  ... 
James  Junkin,  M.  D.,  and  wife,  - 
Eev.  William  H.  Templeton, 

Miss  Hannah  M.  Green, 

Miss  Clara  W.  Eddy,  - 

Miss  Catharine  M.  Workman,  - 

Mrs  Elizabeth  Eeid,  - - - 


1841 — 

1843- 45. 
1S43-43 

1844- 45. 

1846- 48. 

1847- 50. 

1848- 50. 
1848-50 
1848 — 
1S49-50! 

1850 

1851 — 
1850-52. 
1850-53. 

1850- 52. 
1351-52. 

1851 — 

1851- 52. 

1852 — 

1852 

1852 


Died 


Dieo. 


72 


APPENDIX. 


73 


Mias  Elizabeth  Stedhem,  - 1S52-53. 

Eev.  Augustus  W.  Loomis  and  wife,  - 1852-53. 

Mrs.  Longhridge,  ....  1853 — - 
Miss  Mary  Lewis,  - - - - 1853 — 

Miss  Kezidh  Anderson,  - 1853 — 

Mr.  Alexander  M'Ewen,  - 1853 


Choctaws  : — Eev.  James  E.  Ramsey  and  wife,  - 1816-49. 

Mr.  Oliver  P.  Stark,  - 1846-49. 

Mr.  Charles  H.  Gardiner  and  wife,  - 1846-49. 

Mr.  Lewis  Bissell,  - 1S46-49. 

Miss  Elizabeth  J.  Morrison,  - - 1846 — 

Mr.  Joseph  McLure  and  wife,  - - 1846-47. 

Mr.  Joseph  S.  Betz  and  wife,  - 1846-52. 

Charles  Fishback,  M.  D.,  - 1848-49. 

Mr.  Jonathan  Dioight,  - 1848-52. 

Miss  Snsan  Dntcher,  - " - - - 1848-51 

• Eev.  Alexander  Eeid,  - - - 1849 — 

Mrs.  Eeid,  ------  1850 

Eev.  Casper  E.  Gregory  and  wife,  - 1849-50. 

Eev.  Alexander  J.  Graham,  - - 1849-50. 

Mr.  Joseph  G.  Turner,  ...  1850-52. 

Miss  F.  K.  Thompson,  ...  1850-52. 

Eev.  Hamilton  Balentine  and  wife,  - 1850-52. 

Eev.  John  Edwards  and  wife,  - - 1851-53. 

Mr.  Truman  Judson,  - - - - 1S51 

Mr.  George  Ainslie,  - 1852 — 

Mrs.  Ainslie,  -----  1853 

Mr.  Eeuben  Lowrie,  - - - - 1852-53. 

Mr.  E.  J.  Burtt  and  wife,  - - - 1S53 

Mr.  J.  Harvey  Nourse  and  wife,  - 1S53 

Mr.  Edward  Evans  and  wife,  - - 1S53 — 


Ohahas  and  Otoes  i — Eev.  Edmund  McKinney  and  wife, 
Mr.  Paul  Bloohm,  - - - - 

Mr.  David  E.  Bead,  - - - - 

Miss  E.  Higby,  - - - - - 

Mr.  Henry  Martin  and  wife, 

Miss  Martha  Fullerton,  - - - 

Mr.  James  C.  Dillett  and  wife,  - 
Miss  Mary  E.  Woods,  - - - - 

Mr.  David  Jones  and  wife,  - - - 


1846-53. 

1846- 47. 

1847- 52. 
1847-49. 
1850-51. 
1850-52. 

1853 

1852 — 
1853 


Semixoles  : — Mr.  John  Lilley  and  wife,  - 

Mr.  John  D.  Bemo  and  wife,  - 


1848 

1848 — • 


Chickasaws:— Mr.  James  8.  Allan  and  wife,  - - 1849 — 

Eev.  Andrew  M.  Watson  and  wife,  - 1852-53. 

Mr.  Leander  W.  Davies,  - - - 1852 — 

Mr.  John  McCarter,  - - - - 1852 

Eev.  Hamilton  Balentine  and  wife,  - 1852 — 

Miss  F.  K.  Thompson,  - - - 1852 — 

Miss  Hannah  M.  Green,  ...  1852 — 
Miss  Mary  Jane  Bums,  ...  1S53 — 
Miss  Maria  Shellubarger,  - - - 1853 — 

Miss  Anna  M.  Turner,  ...  1853 

Miss  Mary  Jane  Wilson,  - - - 1853  — 


Note. — N ames  printed  in  Italic  denote  persons  of  Indian  birth. 


Died. 


A GENERAL  STATEMENT  OF  RECEIPTS. 


Died. 


RECEIPTS  OF  THE  WESTERN  FOREIGN"  MISSIONARY  SOCIETY. 


For  First  Year  to  May, 

1833, 

$ 6,431  90 

Second  “ “ 

1834, 

16,296  46 

Third  “ “ 

1835, 

17,677  52 

Fourth  “ “ 

1836, 

19,123  36 

Fifth  “ “ 

1837, 

32,832  54 

RECEIPTS  OF  THE  BOARD  OF  FOREIGN  MISSIONS 
OF  THE  PRESBYTERIAN  CHURCH. 


First  Year  to  May, 

1838, 

- 

- 

- 

45,498  62 

Second  “ 

it 

1839, 

- 

- 

- 

58,779  18 

Third  “ 

it 

1840, 

- 

- 

- 

54,644  65 

Fourth  “ 

it 

1841, 

- 

- 

- 

67,081  58 

Fifth 

a 

1842, 

- 

- 

- 

57,908  29 

Sixth  “ 

u 

1843, 

- 

- 

- 

55,163  66 

Seventh  “ 

it 

1844, 

- 

- 

- 

63,718  44 

Eighth  “ 

u 

1845, 

- 

- 

- 

82,872  69 

Ninth  “ 

it 

1846, 

- 

- 

- 

90,561  15 

Tenth  “ 

(( 

1847, 

- 

- 

- 

93,679  34 

Eleventh  “ 

(( 

1848, 

- 

- 

- 

108,586  3S 

Twelfth  “ 

it 

1849, 

- 

- 

- 

110,534  40 

Thirteenth  “ 

It 

1850, 

- 

- 

- 

126,075  40 

Fourteenth  “ 

“ 

1851, 

- 

- 

- 

139,084  33 

MANUAL  OF  MISSIONS. 


74 


Receipts  continued. 

Fifteenth  Year  to  May,  1852,  ...  144,922  90 

Sixteenth  “ “ 1858,  - - - 153,268  88 

$1,534,741  62 

Notes. — 1.  The  preceding  figures  show  the  aggregate  receipts  in  each  year;  that  is, 
the  amount  received  from  all  sources.  The  sums  actually  contributed  by  the  churches 
were  considerably  less.  For  example,  in  the  aggregate  of  last  year  are  included  $23,240 
from  the  Indian  funds  for  education ; $8,000  from  the  Bible  and  Tract  Societies ; $5,754 
from  friends  in  India ; $1,800  from  the  Covenanter  Church,  and  a few  smaller  sums,  so 
that  $113,939  was  the  amount  given  by  the  Presbyterian  Church.  Of  this  $113,939,  the 
sum  of  $11,402  was  received  in  legacies,  leaving  $102,537  as  the  amount  given  by  the 
churches  for  the  year  ending  on  the  first  of  last  May. 

2.  This  statement  affords  ground  of  much  encouragement  to  the  friends  of  missions. 
They  will  observe  the  large  increase  in  the  whole  amount,  and  also  the  gradual  and 
steady  progress  of  that  increase  for  the  last  ten  years.  A steady  advance  from  year  to 
year  is  the  very  best  condition  of  the  funds  of  any  missionary  institution.  No  doubt 
large  sums,  even  tens  of  thousands  of  dollars,  could  be  well  expended  on  churches, 
chapels,  schools,  and  other  buildings,  in  making  provision  for  the  education  of  the 
children,  and  for  the  support  of  the  widows  of  missionaries,  or  for  the  general  enlarge- 
ment of  the  work  of  missions  in  existing  and  new  fields  of  labor ; but  for  the  current  or 
regular  expenses  of  the  missionary  work,  the  main  reliance  must  be  on  the  systematic 
contributions  of  the  congregations.  If  these  should  fall  offi  or  prove  to  be  irregular,  or 
proceed  from  mere  impulse  instead  of  enlightened  Christian  principle,  serious  embar- 
rassment will  inevitably  follow.  "We  thank  God  for  the  steady  growth  of  missionary 
feeling  in  the  Church,  as  indicated  by  these  Returns. 


3.  Yet  the  fact  must  not  be  forgotten,  that  it  is  only  a very  limited  and  partial 
support  which  the  cause  of  missions  has  heretofore  received.  The  Minutes  of  the 
General  Assembly  of  last  year  report  about  220,000  church  members  in  our  com- 
munion ; so  that  if  each  and  every  one  had  given  an  equal  part  of  the  sum  of  $109,537, 
the  amount  to  each  would  have  been  less  than  one  cent  each  week ! Many  who  were 
not  church  members  gave  their  willing  offerings  to  promote  this  cause.  Many,  both 
church  members  and  others,  gave  five  dollars,  ten  dollars,  twenty  dollars,  and  upwards, 
to  hundreds,  and  even  thousands  each.  Of  course,  then,  many  gave  nothing  at  all. 
Now,  who  is  so  poor  as  not  to  be  able  to  aid,  in  some  degree,  a work  like  this?  "Who 
could  not  spare  or  earn  something  ? If  only  the  hearts  of  all  were  deeply  concerned,  or 
if  an  opportunity  were  afforded,  and  a warm  invitation  addressed  to  all  the  churches,  by 
their  office  bearers,  there  could  be  no  doubt  as  to  what  would  be  the  result.  But 
while  so  many  do  not  practically  recognize  the  duty  of  giving  money  to  support  this 
cause,  those  who  do  will  endeavor  to  supply  their  lack  of  service ; and  God  will,  as 
we  believe,  graciously  incline  more  and  more  of  His  people  to  engage  in  this  work, 
until  eventually  we  shall  be  in  practice  as  in  profession  a missionary  body,  marked  by 
the  piety  of  the  primitive  Christians.  This  is  our  hope. 

4.  A million  and  a half  of  dollars  seems  to  be  a large  sum  of  money  for  one  object.  Yes, 
but  it  is  the  aggregate  of  twenty-one  years’  donations  for  the  conversion  of  the  world, 
and  we  spend  in  each  year  more  than  that  sum  on  single  articles  of  luxury.  Far  more 
is  spent  each  year  by  our  countrymen  on  brandy,  or  on  cigars.  Besides,  who  can 
estimate  the  worth  of  many  souls  already  saved  ? Who  can  count  the  value  of  the  seed 
sown  in  many  lands  ? Who  can  compute  the  blesssedness  of  hearing  the  Saviour  say 
in  the  great  day,  “Well  done,  good  and  faithful  servant?”  — Foreign  Missionary, 
January,  1854. 


■ 


V 


9 


9 


n: 


Date  Due 


